FCC ID: VT8-PSENML RFID Proximity switch

 

PSEN ml b 1.1

} PSEN sensor technology Operating Manual-1003884-EN-08 Preface This document is the original document. All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made for the user's internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documenta-

tion will be gratefully received. Source code from third-party manufacturers or open source software has been used for some components. The relevant licence information is available on the Internet on the Pilz homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. SD means Secure Digital Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 Validity of documentation Using the documentation Definition of symbols Safety 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 Intended use Safety regulations Safety assessment Additional documents that apply Use of qualified personnel Warranty and liability Disposal For your safety Overview 3.1 3.2 Unit features Scope of supply Function description 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 Structure Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) Activation with specification of direction Activation without specification of direction Safety Device Diagnostics Operating modes Block diagram Auxiliary release Recommissioning Prevent restart Escape release Recommissioning Wiring 5.1 5.2 5.3 Important information Pin assignment, connector and cable EMC requirements Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 Important information Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Single connection Connection to Pilz evaluation devices Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Section 7 Teaching in the actuator 7.1 PSEN ml 1.1 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 6 6 6 6 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 14 15 18 18 20 20 21 22 23 23 23 23 25 25 25 27 28 28 29 29 3 Contents Section 8 Installation 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 Important information Tapped hole Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Install fixing screws side-on to actuator Centre the bolt in the actuator housing Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 Installation on sliding gate Installation on swing gate Installation with mounting bracket Installation with mounting plate Installing the escape release Important information Installation positions for escape release Installation stationary escape release Installation external escape release Uninstalling the escape release Section 9 Adjustment 30 30 31 33 33 35 35 36 37 39 40 40 40 41 42 44 47 48 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 4 Contents Section 10 Operation 10.1 10.2 Normal mode Error display Section 11 Checks and maintenance Section 12 Dimensions Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Technical details 13.1 13.2 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I Safety characteristic data Supplementary data 14.1 14.2 14.3 Radio approval Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit Order reference System 15.1 15.2 Accessories Section 16 Appendix Section 17 EC declaration of conformity 49 49 51 52 53 60 63 63 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 69 70 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 5 Introduction 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Validity of documentation This documentation is valid for the product PSEN ml b 1.1 from Version 2.0. This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and provides guidelines on how to connect the product. Using the documentation This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-

erence. Definition of symbols Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:

DANGER!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. WARNING!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. CAUTION!

This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. NOTICE This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-

aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-

ance. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 6 Introduction INFORMATION This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-

tures. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 7 Safety 2 2.1 Safety Intended use The safety gate system is used for interlocking and guard locking swing gates and sliding gates. The safety gate system can be operated in two ways:

} Unlocking with condition The safety gate system prevents the safety gate from being unlocked while there is any hazard within the danger zone.

} Unlocking without condition The operator can unlock the safety gate system at any time. After starting the unlock-

ing, the guard locking creates a stop command. The time required to unlock the inter-

locking guard has to be longer than the time required to stop the hazardous machine function. The hazardous machine function may only be executed under the following conditions:

} There is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 and

} There is a low signal at safety outputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/Un-

lock Request 2). Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) may only be operated under the following condition:

} Plant is in a safe condition Make sure that this is the case with an AND operation in the safety system immediately before the output is operated. The safety switch meets the requirements in accordance with:

} EN 60947-5-3 with the actuator PSEN ml 1.1: PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Coding level Low, type 4 The safety switch may only be used with the corresponding actuator PSEN ml 1.1. The safety level PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 is only achieved if

}

} The solenoid has 2-channel operation via safe, tested outputs, suitable for PL e (Cat. the safety outputs use 2-channel processing 4)/SIL CL 3 applications. With 1-channel operation of the safety inputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/

Unlock Request 2) it is only possible to achieve safety level PLd(Cat.2)/SILCL2. Foreseeable misuse

} Safety switches and actuators of the safety gate system PSEN ml b 1.1 must not be used as mechanical limit stops

} Use of the PSEN ml b 1.1 under corrosive environmental conditions (cooling emulsions, surface treatment, gases, ) Please contact Pilz. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 8 Safety 2.2 2.2.1 Safety regulations Safety assessment Before using a device it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the Machinery Directive. Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-

quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-

isational standpoint. 2.2.2 Additional documents that apply 2.2.3 Please read and take note of the following documents. Only for use of the Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD):

} Operating manual for the fieldbus module, for example SDD ES ETH or SDD ES PROFIBUS

} System description "Safety Device Diagnostics"

For the use of passive junctions:

} Operating manual of a passive junction, for example:

PSEN ix2 F4 code PSEN ix2 F8 code PDP67 F 4 code You will need to be conversant with the information in these documents in order to fully un-

derstand this operating manual. Use of qualified personnel The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned by competent persons. A competent person is a qualified and knowledgeable person who, because of their train-

ing, experience and current professional activity, has the specialist knowledge required. To be able to inspect, assess and operate devices, systems and machines, the person has to be informed of the state of the art and the applicable national, European and international laws, directives and standards. It is the companys responsibility only to employ personnel who

} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-

tion,

} Have read and understood the information provided in the section entitled Safety

} Have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the spe-

cific application. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 9 Safety 2.2.4 2.2.5 Warranty and liability All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if

} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended,

} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual,

} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified,

} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB boards, soldering work etc.). Disposal

}

In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-

lated characteristic data.

} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act). 2.3 For your safety WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to substituting an actuator from the interlocking and guard locking system Substituting an actuator for an inappropriate actuator may lead to serious in-

jury and death. You should prevent the interlocking and guard locking system from being manipulated with an inappropriate actuator. Keep the substitute actuator in a safe place and protect it from unau-

thorised access. If substitute actuators are used, these must be installed as described under Installation [

30]

If the original actuators are replaced with substitute actuators, the ori-

ginal actuators must be destroyed before disposal.

} Do not remove the connector's protective cap until you are just about to connect the unit. This will prevent potential contamination. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 10 Overview 3 3.1 Overview Unit features

} Safe guard locking for swing gates and sliding gates

} Safe interlocking (position monitoring)

} Transponder technology

}

} Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD) 2 safety outputs Safety Device Diagnostics can be used to poll sensor information, to perform ac-

tions and to read configuration parameters Manipulation protection in accordance with ISO 14119 (chap. 7.2.d) is possible by verifying the short name of the actuator through the controller via SDD communica-

tion

} Diagnostic input for Y1 for Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD)

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 for Safety Device Diagnostics

} Monitoring of shorts between the safety outputs

} Guard locking element keeps the safety gate from being opened unintentionally

} Auxiliary release for opening the safety gate

}

} Suitable for left and right hinged safety gates

} Pilz coding type: Coded

} M12, 8-pin male connector

}

1 signal output LEDs:

Supply voltage/fault Status of actuator Status of guard locking Input lights up yellow (without function)

} The bolt in the actuator can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing before the actuator is installed. As a result, the actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally.

} The safety switch PSEN ml b 1.1 can be expanded using a stationary or external es-

cape release (see Order reference: Accessories [

The stationary escape release can be expanded by 25 mm max. two times. The external escape releases are available with push/pull cables between 1.5and4m in length (grading 50cm). 66]). 3.2 Scope of supply

} Scope of supply PSEN ml b 1.1 Safety switch PSEN ml b 1.1 Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 11 Function description 4 4.1 Function description Structure The interlocking and guard locking system prevents the safety gates to the danger zone from being opened while there is any hazard within the danger zone (machine movement, voltage, ...). The safety outputs may have a high or low signal, depending on the position of the actuator and the signal path of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). Gate closed Gate open Safety outputs 12 and 22 Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

} Actuator is detected and

} Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low.

} Diagnostic input Y1 If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is automatically activ-

ated and data is read. If no fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is not used.

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 The status of the actuator is output. If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the signal output/diagnostic output for the writing of data is activated. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 12 Safety switchActuatorSafety switchActuator Function description 4.2 Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation)

}

If there is a low signal at safety inputs S31 and S41, the guard locking pin does not change its position.

} Guard locking may only be deactivated once the hazardous movement has been com-

pleted. Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics

} The safety inputs S31 and S41 have a high signal within max. 500 ms after the receipt of the guard locking activation. Guard locking is activated through a high signal (length 350 - 400 ms ) at inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse (length 350 - 400 ms ) at these inputs deactivates guard locking. 4.2.1 Activation with specification of direction

} The guard locking is activated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S31 before S41).

} The guard locking is deactivated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S41 before S31). Legend tmax Maximum time between the rising edges from S31 and S42 4.2.2 Activation without specification of direction

} The guard locking changes its state when the time between the rising edges from S31 and S41<20ms. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 13 S31S41tmaxGuard lockingS31S41tmaxGuard locking Function description 4.3 Safety Device Diagnostics Safety Device Diagnostics is an option that can be selected independently of the safety-re-

lated wiring. When using the Safety Device Diagnostics, up to 16 sensors can be connected as a sub-

scriber to a fieldbus module. The communication of the sensors with the fieldbus module is automatically built up again with each new supply of the supply voltage. As a result, a sensor can be exchanged, e.g. when servicing, without the need for special measures. An exchange can be detected via the fieldbus module e.g. through the serial number.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module:

Poll information of the sensors (examples: what sensor in the series has switched, at what point could there be an open circuit in the series connection) Read configuration parameters of the sensor (examples: Number of teach-in pro-

cesses remaining, serial number of the switch) Perform actions (example: poll updated actuator name) Selectively activate or deactivate guard locking of individual PSEN ml within a series connection The results of the sensor diagnostics can be checked already during the installation phase via the display in the fieldbus module, without the need to connect the fieldbus module to the network.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module for simple wiring:

Information is passed on via the fieldbus module directly to the network Mappings of the signal outputs to the sensor are automated by the SDD. This prevents wiring errors and an expansion or reduction of the sensors is possible without the need to change existing wiring. Wiring in accordance with IP20: Rapid installation in the control cabined is enabled. Further information on Safety Device Diagnostics can be found in Additional documents that apply [

} Series connection of diagnostics with Safety Device Diagnostics 9]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 14 Y1Y32Y1Y321. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlFieldbus module Function description 4.4 Operating modes The safety switch can be used in various operating modes.

} Operation without safety device diagnostics Standard operating mode After every restart the safety switch is in operation without Safety Device Dia-

gnostics. No communication with Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Safety switch supplies diagnostic data to Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with active use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Activate/deactivate the guard locking by a combination of a Safety Device Dia-

gnostics command and the status of the safety inputs S31 and S41 (S31 and S41 must have a high signal). The safety requirements are guaranteed by the signals S31 and S41 (the fieldbus for Safety Device Diagnostics communication is not safe).

} Operation with specification of direction when activating/deactivating he guard locking A specification of direction can be used to control the change of the guard locking status. Toggling: The safety switch changes with each simultaneous controlling of S31 and S41 the guard locking status (activated <-> deactivated). Force Direction: The safety switch is selectively activated or deactivated by offset activation of the rising edges of S31 and S41. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 15 Function description Timing diagrams Fig.: Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] Gate is closed

[3] Guard locking is activated by the safety control system

[4] Guard locking is activated

[5] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[6] Outputs will be deactivated

[7] Guard locking will be deactivated

[8] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 16

[7]S31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][4][5][8][t1][t1][t2][6][t2]Y1[2][3]SDD command guard lockingGuard lockingActuator Function description Fig.: Passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] Gate is closed

[3] Guard locking is activated

[4] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[5] Outputs will be deactivated

[6] Guard locking will be deactivated

[7] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 17 S31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][4][5][6][8][7][t1][t1][t2][t2]Y1[2][3]Guard lockingActuator Function description 4.5 Block diagram 4.6 Auxiliary release The auxiliary release enables guard locking to be opened from the access side to the danger zone. The safety switch has auxiliary releases on three sides. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 18 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLockPowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1&&Function description INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Operation [

50]) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Legend

[1] Auxiliary release screw Torx T10

[2] Security screw Torx T10, sealed with varnish when delivered Mode of operation:

1. Remove the security screw [2] using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] half a turn anti-clockwise using a Torx T10 screw-

driver. The guard locking pin is displaced and the bolt is released. The safety gate to the danger zone can be opened. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 19

[1][2]Function description 4.6.1 Recommissioning Recommission PSEN ml b 1.1 1. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] (see Figure [

Torx T10 screwdriver. 19]) half a turn clockwise using a 2. Re-insert the security screw [2] (see Figure [

3. Seal the security screw with varnish. 4. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 5. Carry out a function test on the safety switch and actuator. The safety function may only 19]) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. be checked by qualified personnel. INFORMATION If the auxiliary release screw is not turned back correctly after use, the PSEN ml b 1.1 switches to a fault condition. 4.7 Prevent restart To prevent the machine restarting (unintentionally) while there is someone inside the danger zone, a padlock can be attached via the through hole on the actuator (see diagram). As a result the actuator cannot engage with the safety switch, guard locking is not activated and the machine is prevented from starting. Legend

[1] Through hole on the actuator for attaching a padlock

[2] Padlock

[3] Actuator If the actuator is to blocked using several locks in parallel, a multiple lock can be used (e.g. Brady Lockout device, article no.852439). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 20

[1][2][3]Function description 4.8 Escape release Distinction between escape release and emergency release

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from outside the hazardous area.

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from within the hazardous area and it corresponds to an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed within the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed outside the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. Legend

[1] Escape release stationary

[2] Escape release externally

[3] Tension pressure cables in lengths of 1.50m to 4m

[4] Button of the escape release pin

[5] Escape release pin INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Operation [

50]) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 21

[1][2][3][4][5]Function description Mode of operation If in the hazardous area the button of the escape release pin [4] is pressed towards the safety gate, the escape release impacts directly on the auxiliary release of the safety switch and the auxiliary release unlocks the safety gate. The safety gate can be opened immedi-

ately, enabling the operator to leave the danger zone. There is a low signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 if the escape release was operated. Scope

} Scope of supply stationary escape release 1 escape release stationary 1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk

} Scope of supply external escape release 66]) 1 escape release external with installed push/pull cables (see Order reference:

Accessories [

1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk 4.8.1 Recommissioning 1. Pull back the button of the escape release pin. 2. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 3. Carry out a function test using the escape release. The safety function may only be checked by qualified personnel. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 22 Wiring 5 5.1 5.2 Wiring Important information

} Hand-tighten the connector.

}

Information given in the Technical details [

60] must be followed. Pin assignment, connector and cable 8-pin M12 connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 2)

+24 V UB Safety output channel 1 Safety output channel 2 Signal output/diagnostic output Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 1) 0 V UB Diagnostics input Terminal designation S41 Cable colour (Pilz cable) white A1 12 22 Y32 S31 A2 Y1 Brown Green Yellow grey Pink Blue Red NOTICE The colour marking for the connection lead only applies for the cable that Pilz supplies as an accessory 5.3 EMC requirements

} Ensure the wiring and EMC requirements of EN 60204-1 are met.

} UL requirement: The supply voltage to the safety switch must be protected with a quick-

acting fuse (see Technical details [

60]).

} The inputs and outputs of the safety switch must have a protective separation to voltages over 60 V AC.

} The power supply must meet the regulations for extra low voltages with protective sep-

aration (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN60204-1. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 23 Wiring INFORMATION Only use safety relays with a 24 VDC supply voltage. Safety relays with a wide-range power supply or in AC device versions have internal potential isolation and are not suitable as evaluation devices. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 24 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6 6.1 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Important information Make sure that the selected evaluation device has the following properties:

}

2-channel with feasibility monitoring Both OSSDs must change switch state synchronously. In particular, the evaluation device must monitor that the state of both OSSDs was "Gate unlocked" before both re-

turn to the "Gate locked" state and vice-versa.

} OSSD signals are evaluated through 2 channels

} The state of the OSSDs must be tested before and after safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated (solenoid operation) (see Timing diagram [

16]) WARNING!

Potential loss of safety function due to failure to test for a safe condition Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. Use an evaluation device/safety system to test whether the plant is in a safe condition. Do not operate the solenoid of the PSEN ml b 1.1 via S31/S41 un-

less the plant is in a safe condition.

} The use of Safety Device Diagnostics is described in the System Description "Safety Device Diagnostics". 6.2 Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Use in PL e (Cat. 4) applications

} Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) have 2-channel operation via safe out-

puts, which are suitable for PL e (Cat. 4) applications 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Monitoring of shorts across signal cables through activation of guard locking Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 25 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 3) applications

}

2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) via relay out-

puts 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Exclusion of shorts across signal cables through appropriate measures (e.g. protected cable layout, see EN ISO 13849-2) Legend

[1] Protected cable layout Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 26 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 1Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 124 V[1]Programmable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 2) applications

}

}

}

1-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) 2-channel processing of safety outputs 1-channel operation for interconnected safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), with 1A 6.3 Single connection Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 27 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock RequestProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking24 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1ActuatorSafety switchProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.4 Connection to Pilz evaluation devices The safety switch PSEN ml b 1.1 can be connected to Pilz evaluation devices, for example. Suitable Pilz evaluation devices are, for example:

} PNOZmulti for safety gate monitoring Configure the switch in the PNOZmulti Configurator with switch type 3.

} PSS for safety gate monitoring with standard function block SB064, SB066 or FS_SafetyGate

} PSSuniversal PLC for safety gate monitoring with function block FS_SafetyGate The correct connection to the respective evaluation device is described in the operating manual for the evaluation device. Make sure that the connection is made in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual for the selected evaluation device. Connection to PNOZmulti is illustrated by way of example. 6.4.1 Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 28 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSEN ml0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)TxRxActivation of guard locking via SDD ES module Teaching in the actuator 7 7.1 Teaching in the actuator PSEN ml 1.1 Any corresponding Pilz actuator (see Technical Details [

is brought into the response range. 60]) is detected as soon as it Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 29 Installation 8 8.1 Installation Important information INFORMATION Refer to the guidelines for designing guards and integrating interlocks with guard locking in ENISO14120. NOTICE Install the safety switch and actuator so that the possibilities of defeat are reduced to a minimum (see guidelines for reducing the possibilities for de-

feating interlocking devices in EN ISO 14119). NOTICE Install safety switch and actuator so that it is not possible to reach through with hand or finger.

} The safety switch and actuator should be installed opposite each other in parallel.

} Make sure that the actuator makes complete contact with the mounting surface.

} Make sure that the at least one of the auxiliary release/escape releases can be oper-

ated after installation.

} For a minimum screw depth of 6 mm, M5 screws with resistance class 8.8 should be used to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

60].

} Use non-removable flat head locking screws to attach the safety switch and actuator

(e.g. cheese-head or pan head screws) or rivets.

} Use the same type of screw to attach the safety switch and actuator.

}

} Prevent self-loosening of the fastening elements on the safety switch and actuator, Installation of the safety switch and actuator must be concealed. On the safety switch: through torque (see Technical details [

On the actuator: through torque (see Technical details [

60]) 60]) and bonded screw retention

} Make sure that the actuator does not present a risk.

} The mounting surfaces for safety switches and actuators can have a max. unevenness of 0.5 mm.

} Prevent the safety switch and actuator being exposed to heavy shock or vibration.

} The fastening of safety switch and actuator has to be sufficiently stable to ensure the proper operation of the safety switch and the actuator. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 30 Installation 8.2 Tapped hole

} To fix the safety switch at the three possible mounting positions, there are 3 drill holes on 3 sides. As a result, the safety switch can be installed on the frames of left and right hinged slid-

ing gates and swing gates. If necessary use a Mounting plate [

bracket [

Different holding forces arise, based on the installation. Fixing screws in parallel to actuator [

39] (see Order reference: Accessories [

40] or Mounting 66]). 33]:

Holding forceFZh=7.500 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=15.000 N Fixing screws side-on to actuator [

33]:

Holding forceFZh=5.000 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=10.000 N INFORMATION Please note that the stated holding forces only apply when installed without a mounting bracket. The holding forces when installed with a mounting bracket can be found in the table "Technical details for mounting bracket [

65]". The tapped holes must have a depth of at least 6 mm. Installation of safety switch Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, no mounting plate Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, with mounting plate Tapped hole Tapped holes for four M5 screws on the mounting surface. Tapped holes for two M8 screws on the mounting surface, for attaching the mount-

ing plate. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 31 Installation Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, no mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, with mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Actuator, no mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M5 screws (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 32 3119,2193,54,5 8,5 5,35 1048 Installation Actuator, with mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M6 screws (see Dimensions).

(Diagram: order no. 570 492 as example) 8.3 Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Use four M5 screws to attach the switch to the mounting surface.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

60]. Fig.: Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Legend

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator 8.4 Install fixing screws side-on to actuator

[1] Front of safety switch

[2] Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 33 6,5XY[3][3][1][2][1][2]Installation Use four screws [1] to fix the safety switch to the mount-

ing surface. Fully tighten the four screws

[1] on the safety switch. Torque setting: Please note the information provided un-

der Technical details [

60]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 34

[1][1][1][1]Installation 8.5 Centre the bolt in the actuator housing The bolt must be centred in the actuator housing in order to maintain the distances on set-

tling gates. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing (see diagram). Bolt centred within the actuator hous-

ing Bolt not centred within the actuator housing 8.6 Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 The actuator can be installed vertically on a gate (see Figure [

ator horizontally, the bolt can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing prior to installation. 1. On the housing skin [3] in the actuator housing, press down the spring plate [1] on both 12]). To install the actu-

sides of the bolt and keep the plate held down. 2. Rotate the bolt in the housing skin by 90 in the required direction ([2]). Legend

[1] Spring plate in the housing skin

[2] Bolt, can be rotated 90

[3] Housing skin Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 35

[1][2][3]Installation 3. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing [

35]. 8.7 Installation on sliding gate Legend

[1] Safety switch, installed on gate frame

[2] Actuator with mounting bracket (available as Accessory [

sliding gate 66]), installed on 1. Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

33] or side-on to actuator [

33] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 36

[1][2]Installation 8.8 Installation on swing gate Fig.: Swing gate with internal and external hinge Legend

[1]

[2]

1. Safety switch on gate frame Actuator, installed on swing gate Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

33] or side-on to actuator [

33] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. The actuator should engage smoothly into the safety switch. Install the safety switch horizontally at a swing gate Please note:

Depending on the installation boundary conditions, a larger gate radius may be required

(see diagram). Please contact Pilz when smaller gate radiuses are required. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 37

[1][2][2]Installation Make sure that a slight shift of the rotation point of the door is maintained when installing the actuator. Legend R The distance of the upper part of the safety switch from the rotation point of the door X Parallel shift of the actuator Tilt angle when installing the actuator

} Tilt the actuator during installation by 10 in the following situations:

50 mm < X < 75 mm and R < 600 mm X < 50 mm and R < 500 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 38 Installation 8.9 Installation with mounting bracket 1. Use two M6 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the gate. The position of the drill holes can be taken from the section entitled Dimensions. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the mounting bracket. Fig.: Actuator, installed on mounting bracket Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 39 Installation 8.10 Installation with mounting plate 1. Attach the mounting plate to the swing gate/sliding gate. 2. Use four M5 screws to fix the safety switch [

33] to the mounting plate. Fig.: Safety switch, installed on mounting plate 8.11 Installing the escape release 8.11.1 Important information WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to the incorrect installation of the escape re-

lease!

If the button of the escape release pin is accessible from the outside, the guard locking device can be released from the outside and the safety gates opened, although the hazardous machine is switched on. Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. The escape release should be installed so that it is only accessible from in-

side the danger zone.

} The button of the escape release pin must be impossible to reach from a position out-

side the protected area.

} Make sure that the escape release cannot be operated unintentionally. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 40 Installation

} Prevent the effect of transverse forces on the escape release.

} Secure the screw joints with a with a threadlocker.

} Ensure that the button of the escape release pin is clearly visible and that is it not covered.

} Make sure that the min. bending radius of the push/pull cable of60mm is maintained when using the external escape release.

} Make sure that the button of the escape release pin does not present a risk.

} The mounting surface has to completely cover the bottom of the escape release hous-

ing. The bottom of the escape release housing must not be accessible after installation. 8.11.2 Installation positions for escape release The stationary escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in three dif-

ferent directions each. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 41

[1][2]Installation The external escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in four different directions each. The push/pull cable can be led out on different sides. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back 8.11.3 Installation stationary escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 42

[1][2]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The button of the escape release pin can be removed for the installation (e.g. when the escape release pin is to be run through a wall). The button of the escape release pin must be secured again with a threadlocker and hand-tightened after escape release in-

stallation is complete

} To bridge larger distances the escape release pin can be extended by a max. of 25mm two times (see Order reference: Accessories [

66]). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 43

[1][2][3]Installation Legend

[1] Button of the escape release pin

[2] Escape release pin 8.11.4 Installation external escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 44

[2][1]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 45

[1][2][3]Installation 4. Screw the housing of the escape release with the screws [1] to a mounting surface with 6 - 6,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The screws of the push/pull cable [2] can be loosened to make installation easier (e.g. when the push/pull cable is to be run through a wall). The screws must be fixed with 6 -

6,5 Nm after the escape release is installed. Legend

[1] Screwing the escape release to the mounting area

[2] Screwing the cable Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 46

[1][1][2]Installation 8.11.5 Uninstalling the escape release If the push/pull cable is to be run through a conduit pipe, the cable has to be uninstalled at the escape release first. Prerequisites

} The conduit pipe must have a diameter of at least 12mm. Procedure:

1. Lift off the cover [1] (e.g. with a screwdriver with a flat blade). Legend

[1] Cover

[2] Nut M10 x 0,75

[3] Fork head

[4] Slot nut 2. Loosen the nut [2]. 3. Pull out the push/pull cable with the slot nut [4] and remove the slot nut and the nut [2]

from the cable. 4. Run the cable through the conduit pipe. 5. Push the nut [2] and the slot nut [4] over the fork head [3] back on the cable. 6. Push the cable with the fork head [3] on the fork in the escape release. The slot nut [4]

must be fitted into the nut again. 7. Tighten the nut [2] with 6 - 6,5 Nm. 8. Put the lid [1] back on. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 47

[1][2][4][3]Adjustment 9 Adjustment Please note:

} Safety switch and actuator must be aligned correctly

} Distances are maintained as stated in the following diagram

} Actuator is centred (see Centre bolt in actuator housing [

} Always test the function with a connected evaluation device.

} When installing an external or stationary escape release, check the function of the es-

35]) cape release with a connected evaluation device. View from above View from the side Perspective view

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Max. lateral offset

+/-3,0 mm

[4] Max. vertical offset

+/-3,0 mm

[5] Max. angular offset around the X axis +/-2,0 deg

[6] Max. angular offset around the Y axis +/-2,5 deg

[7] Max. angular offset around the Z axis +/-7,5 deg

[8] Max. offset in closing direction

+/-2 mm Attach safety switch and actuator Once the safety switch and actuator are correctly aligned, the actuator's screw connection must be tightened. 1. Tighten up one M5 screw. 2. For applications with increased safety requirements (e.g. SIL CL 2 PL d), swap the second M5 screw for an M5 locking screw. 3. Tighten up the M5 screw or M5 locking screw. Please note the max. torque setting stated in the Technical details [

60]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 48

[7][3][1][2][6][8][4][2][1][5][2][1]Operation 10 Operation NOTICE The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be checked by qualified personnel. Status indicators:

}

}

}

}

"Device" LED illuminates green: The unit is ready for operation

"Safety Gate" LED lights up yellow: Actuator is within the response range

"Lock" LED lights up green: Guard locking active

"Input" LED lights up yellow: The unit is ready for operation Legend:

LED off LED on LED flashes (500 ms on, 500 ms off) LED flashes quickly (50 ms on, 950 ms off) LED flashes very quickly (25 ms on, 475 ms off) 10.1 Normal mode LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status PSEN ml b 1.1 is started Green Yellow Green Green Yellow Green Yellow Yel-

low Yel-

low Yel-

low Yel-

low Green Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking deactivated Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking activated Green Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 49 Operation Warnings LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Display not defin-

itive Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detected, guard locking cannot be activated / deac-

tivated The supply voltage to safety inputs S31 and S41 was switched back on before the auxili-

ary release screw was turned back. Safety switch active despite over or under-

voltage Remedy / meas-

ure Check the actu-

ator's alignment [

to the safety switch. 48]

Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on (see Recommissionin g [

20]). Check the supply voltage. If safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated or de-

activated while an undervoltage warning is present, the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 50 Operation 10.2 Error display LED status Switch status Remedy / measure Device Safety Gate Input Lock Red Yellow Display not definitive Safety switch de-

activated due to under or over-

voltage Yel-

low Check the supply voltage and switch the supply voltage off and then on again. Previous LED display is retained Display not definitive Safety outputs in fault condition Auxiliary release/

escape release activated Display not definitive Error Safety switch does not start Check the wiring and switch the supply voltage off and then on again.

} Auxiliary release: Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on

(see Recommissioning [

20]).

} Escape release: Pull the button of the escape release pin back again and then switch on the voltage supply again (see Re-

commissioning under escape release [

22]). Please contact Pilz. Change the safety switch. Red Red Red Green Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Wrong actuator Use the actuator PSEN ml 1.1. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 51 Checks and maintenance 11 Checks and maintenance Regular inspection of the switch function is required to guarantee the trouble-free, long-

term function. If the interlock and guard locking system is only used rarely (opening and closing the safety gate and activating/deactivating the guard locking device), a manual function test is re-

quired. The correct function of the device should be checked at regular intervals and after each er-

ror. Test intervals in accordance with EN ISO 14119:

}

}

for SIL CL 3/PL e at least 1x per month for SIL CL 2/PL d at least 1x per year The Appendix contains a Check list [

69], which should help you perform the test. Visual inspection:

} Check that the seal on the security screw on the auxiliary release is intact. If the seal is not intact, make sure that the security screw is inserted and use varnish to seal the se-

curity screw.

} Check the safety switch and actuator for damage.

} Make sure that the safety switch and actuator are firmly secured.

} Check the offset of the safety switch and actuator. Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset Max. vertical offset

} Check that the wiring is correct.

} Remove any dirt from the safety switch and actuator. Function test

} The actuator is detected and at the safety outputs 12 and 22 there is a high signal after detection of the actuator.

} The guard locking device can be activated/deactivated when the safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated.

} Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

Actuator is detected and Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Escape release

} Test whether the button of the escape release pin can be detected and reached.

} Check the function of the escape release. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 52 Dimensions 12 Dimensions Safety switch Distance between safety switch mounting surface and actuator mounting surface Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 53 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,52953674069,5 Dimensions Mounting plate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570490 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 54 25512,543,25193,5204,531280(12,5)n8,5M5n8,5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for sliding gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570492 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 55 40301011,7540n6,5n6,563,5101060207,7548M5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for swing gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570493 Fig.: Order no.: 570494 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 56 69,5689,54863,569,515,58,56,54079.5689,569,515,58,56,5404863,5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for sliding gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570495 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 57 581040983011,754015063,5n6,525487,7520M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for swing gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570496 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 58 19769,517768,56,5123150M5205463,525 Dimensions Fig.: Order no.: 570497 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 59 19779,565415063,5251771236,58,520M5 Technical details 13 Technical details General Approvals Sensor's mode of operation Coding level in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Design in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Classification in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Pilz coding type Transponder Frequency band Max. transmitter output Electrical data Supply voltage Voltage Kind Voltage tolerance Output of external power supply (DC) Max. switching frequency Magnet. supply voltage Max. solenoid current t <150 ms Max. cable capacitance at the safety outputs No-load, PNOZ with relay contacts PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS Max. inrush current impulse Current pulse, A1 Pulse duration, A1 Max. unit fuse protection in accordance with UL No-load current Inputs Number Voltage at inputs Current at solenoid input Semiconductor outputs OSSD safety outputs Signal outputs Switching current per output Breaking capacity per output Residual current at "0" signal Potential isolation from system voltage Short circuit-proof Residual current at outputs Voltage drop at OSSDs Conditional rated short circuit current CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed Transponder Low 4 PDDB Coded 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 2 24 V DC 500 mA 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W 2 mA No yes 500 A 1 V 100 A Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 60 Technical details Semiconductor outputs Lowest operating current Utilisation category in accordance with EN 60947-1 Times Test pulse duration, safety outputs Switch-on delay after UB is applied Actuator typ. Actuator max. Delay-on de-energisation Actuator typ. Actuator max. Risk time in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Supply interruption before de-energisation Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Request Processing time activate/deactivate guard locking Environmental data Temperature of metal surface at ambient temperat-

ure: 25 C Ambient temperature In accordance with the standard Temperature range Storage temperature In accordance with the standard Temperature range Climatic suitability In accordance with the standard Humidity EMC Vibration In accordance with the standard Frequency Amplitude Shock stress In accordance with the standard Number of shocks Acceleration Duration Airgap creepage Overvoltage category Pollution degree Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage 1 mA DC-13 450 s 1,1 s 30 ms 50 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 20 ms 350 - 400 ms 100 ms 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 60 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 75 V 0,8 kV Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 61 Technical details Environmental data Protection type Housing In accordance with UL Mechanical data Length of cable with connector Min. bending radius (fixed permanently) K1 Min. bending radius (moving) K1 Cable diameter K1 Escape release available Mechanical life Holding force FZh Fixing screws in parallel to actuator Fixing screws side-on to actuator Holding force F1Max in accordance with ISO 14119 IP67 type 1 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,2 mm No 1,000,000 cycles 7.500 N 5.000 N Fixing screws in parallel to actuator Fixing screws side-on to actuator Latching force Max. vertical offset Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset around the X axis Max. angular offset around the Y axis Max. angular offset around the Z axis Max. offset in closing direction Max. retract speed of actuator Actuator 1 Min. distance between safety switches Connection type Cable Material Max. torque setting for fixing screws Max. torque setting escape release Max. torque setting for mounting plate Max. torque setting for mounting bracket Min. gate radius Dimensions Height Width Depth Actuator dimensions Height Width Depth Weight of safety switch Weight of actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 1.1 0 mm M12, 8-pin male connector LiYY 8 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 6 - 6,5 Nm 1,2 - 1,5 Nm 22 - 24 Nm 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 62 Technical details Mechanical data Weight 1.100 g Where standards are undated, the 2015-11 latest editions shall apply. 13.1 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I The following tables describe the classes and specific values of the product interface and the classes of interfaces compatible with it. The classification is described in the ZVEI posi-

tion paper "Classification of Binary 24 V Interfaces - Functional Safety aspects covered by dynamic testing". Solenoid inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Safe 1-pole HL outputs Source Safety switch Source parameters Test impulse duration Rated current Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

16 Ohm

-

C2 Min.

-

-

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

Drain Evaluation device Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 500 s 1,5 nF C1, C2 Max. 450 s 0,1 A 70 nF 13.2 Safety characteristic data NOTICE You must comply with the safety characteristic data in order to achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 63 Technical details Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

PL d 1-ch. guard locking 2-ch. guard PL e locking 2-ch. OSSD PL e Cat. 2 Cat. 4 Cat. 4 SIL CL 2 4,22E-09 SIL CL 3 SIL CL 3 4,22E-09 2,38E-09 20 20 20 All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety characteristic data. INFORMATION A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values. NOTICE Be sure that you observe the mechanical life. The safety characteristic data are only valid as long as the values of mechanical life are met. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 64 Supplementary data 14 14.1 Supplementary data Radio approval 14.2 Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit 570492 CE 570492 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 420 g 570493 CE 570493 3000 N 6000 N 420 g 570494 CE 570494 3000 N 6000 N 445 g 14.3 Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit 570495 CE 570495 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 3000 N Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 6000 N 260 g 570496 CE 570496 3000 N 6000 N 600 g 570497 CE 570497 3000 N 6000 N 630 g Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 65 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML Order reference 15 15.1 Order reference System Product type PSEN ml b 1.1 unit PSEN ml b 1.1 switch PSEN ml 1.1 actuator Features Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, coded Mechanical safety switch with guard locking, coded Actuator, coded Connection type M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin male connector Order no. 570400 570401 570480 15.2 Accessories Installation accessories Product type PSEN ml escape re-

lease PSEN ml escape re-

lease extension PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 1.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 4.0m PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door PSEN ml bracket swinging door 70 PSEN ml bracket swinging door 80 Features Escape release stationary Extension escape release stationary 25 mm Escape release with push/pull cable 1.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 2 m Escape release external with push/pull cable 2.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.0 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 4 m Mounting plate for installing the safety switch, with 4 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head locking screw, M5x40 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x16 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Order no. 570 460 570 462 570 470 570 471 570 472 570 473 570 474 570 475 570490 570 492 570 493 570 494 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 66 Order reference Product type PSEN ml door handle sliding door PSEN ml door handle swinging door 70 PSEN ml door handle swinging door 80 PSEN screw set bracket swinging door PSEN screw set bracket sliding door Features Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x16. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a swing gate Order no. 570 495 570 496 570 497 570498 Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a sliding gate 570499 Cable Product type PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 3m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 5m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf, 20m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 30m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 0.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 2m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 5m Features 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0.5 m 1 m 1.5 m 2 m 5 m Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 540 333 540 321 540 320 540 319 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight 540 346 540 347 540 340 540 326 540 345 540 341 67 Order reference Features 10 m 20 m 30 m Product type PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 20m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 30m PSEN ml / PSENcs Y junction M12 540 342 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector 540 343 540 344 570 489 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 68 Appendix 16 Appendix The following check list is intended as a guide to provide support during commissioning, re-

commissioning and the prescribed regular testing of the PSEN ml b 1.1. Note that the check list is not intended to replace the plant-specific safety analysis required for commissioning/recommissioning, nor the resulting inspections and actions. INFORMATION Commissioning, recommissioning and regular inspection may only be car-

ried out by qualified personnel. We recommend that you keep the completed check list and store it with the machine docu-

mentation for reference. Date Action Safety switch Number Actuator Number OK Not OK Notes Signature Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 69 EC declaration of conformity 17 EC declaration of conformity This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-

chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads. Authorised representative: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfildern, Germany Operating Manual PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-EN-08 70 Front cover y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

8 1 0 2

, 8 0

-

N E

-

4 8 8 3 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnical support is available from Pilz round the clock. AmericasBrazil+55 11 97569-2804Canada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexico+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsiaChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281South Korea+82 31 450 0680Australia+61 3 95600621EuropeAustria+43 1 7986263-0Belgium, Luxembourg+32 9 3217575France+33 3 88104000Germany+49 711 3409-444Ireland+353 21 4804983Italy, Malta+39 0362 1826711Scandinavia+45 74436332Spain+34 938497433Switzerland+41 62 88979-30The Netherlands+31 347 320477Turkey+90 216 5775552United Kingdom+44 1536 462203You can reach our international hotline on: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PAScong, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, THE SPIRIT OF SAFETY are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using ecological materials and energy-saving technologies. Oces and production facilities are ecologically designed, environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz oers sustainability, plus the security of using energy-ecient products and environmentally-friendly solutions.Pilz GmbH & Co. KG Felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostldern, GermanyTel.: +49 711 3409-0 Fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.com200XXXX-EN-0X0-0-2-3-000, 2017-00 Printed in Germany Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2017

 

 

PSEN ml b 2.1

} PSEN sensor technology Operating Manual-1003895-EN-08 Preface This document is the original document. All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made for the user's internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documenta-

tion will be gratefully received. Source code from third-party manufacturers or open source software has been used for some components. The relevant licence information is available on the Internet on the Pilz homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. SD means Secure Digital Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 Validity of documentation Using the documentation Definition of symbols Safety 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 Intended use Safety regulations Safety assessment Additional documents that apply Use of qualified personnel Warranty and liability Disposal For your safety Overview 3.1 3.2 Unit features Scope of supply Function description 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 Structure Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) Activation with specification of direction Activation without specification of direction Safety Device Diagnostics Operating modes Block diagram Auxiliary release Recommissioning Prevent restart Escape release Recommissioning Wiring 5.1 5.2 5.3 Important information Pin assignment, connector and cable EMC requirements Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 Important information Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Single connection Connection to Pilz evaluation devices Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Section 7 Teaching in the actuator 7.1 PSEN ml 2.1 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 5 5 5 5 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 17 17 19 19 20 21 22 22 22 22 24 24 24 26 27 27 28 28 3 Contents Section 8 7.2 PSEN ml 2.2 Installation 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 Important information Tapped hole Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Install fixing screws side-on to actuator Centre the bolt in the actuator housing Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 Installation on sliding gate Installation on swing gate Installation with mounting bracket Installation with mounting plate Installing the escape release Important information Installation positions for escape release Installation stationary escape release Installation external escape release Uninstalling the escape release Section 9 Adjustment Section 10 Operation 10.1 10.2 Normal mode Error display Section 11 Checks and maintenance Section 12 Dimensions Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Technical details 13.1 13.2 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I Safety characteristic data Supplementary data 14.1 14.2 14.3 Radio approval Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit Order reference 15.1 System Accessories 15.2 Section 16 Appendix Section 17 EC declaration of conformity Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 28 29 29 30 32 33 34 34 35 36 38 39 39 39 40 41 43 46 47 48 48 50 51 53 60 63 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 69 70 4 Introduction 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Validity of documentation This documentation is valid for the product PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 from Version 2.0. This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and provides guidelines on how to connect the product. Using the documentation This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-

erence. Definition of symbols Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:

DANGER!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. WARNING!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. CAUTION!

This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. NOTICE This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-

aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-

ance. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 5 Introduction INFORMATION This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-

tures. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 6 Safety 2 2.1 Safety Intended use The safety gate system is used for interlocking and guard locking swing gates and sliding gates. The safety gate system can be operated in two ways:

} Unlocking with condition The safety gate system prevents the safety gate from being unlocked while there is any hazard within the danger zone.

} Unlocking without condition The operator can unlock the safety gate system at any time. After starting the unlock-

ing, the guard locking creates a stop command. The time required to unlock the inter-

locking guard has to be longer than the time required to stop the hazardous machine function. The hazardous machine function may only be executed under the following conditions:

} There is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 and

} There is a low signal at safety outputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/Un-

lock Request 2). Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) may only be operated under the following condition:

} Plant is in a safe condition Make sure that this is the case with an AND operation in the safety system immediately before the output is operated. The safety switch meets the requirements in accordance with:

} EN 60947-5-3 with the actuator PSEN ml 2.1: PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Coding level High, type 4 The safety switch may only be used with the corresponding actuator PSEN ml 2.1. The safety level PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 is only achieved if

}

} The solenoid has 2-channel operation via safe, tested outputs, suitable for PL e (Cat. the safety outputs use 2-channel processing 4)/SIL CL 3 applications. With 1-channel operation of the safety inputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/

Unlock Request 2) it is only possible to achieve safety level PLd(Cat.2)/SILCL2. Foreseeable misuse

} Safety switches and actuators of the safety gate system PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 must not be used as mechanical limit stops

} Use of the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 under corrosive environmental conditions (cooling emul-

sions, surface treatment, gases, ) Please contact Pilz. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 7 Safety 2.2 2.2.1 Safety regulations Safety assessment Before using a device it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the Machinery Directive. Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-

quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-

isational standpoint. 2.2.2 Additional documents that apply 2.2.3 Please read and take note of the following documents. Only for use of the Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD):

} Operating manual for the fieldbus module, for example SDD ES ETH or SDD ES PROFIBUS

} System description "Safety Device Diagnostics"

For the use of passive junctions:

} Operating manual of a passive junction, for example:

PSEN ix2 F4 code PSEN ix2 F8 code PDP67 F 4 code You will need to be conversant with the information in these documents in order to fully un-

derstand this operating manual. Use of qualified personnel The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned by competent persons. A competent person is a qualified and knowledgeable person who, because of their train-

ing, experience and current professional activity, has the specialist knowledge required. To be able to inspect, assess and operate devices, systems and machines, the person has to be informed of the state of the art and the applicable national, European and international laws, directives and standards. It is the companys responsibility only to employ personnel who

} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-

tion,

} Have read and understood the information provided in the section entitled Safety

} Have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the spe-

cific application. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 8 Safety 2.2.4 2.2.5 Warranty and liability All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if

} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended,

} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual,

} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified,

} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB boards, soldering work etc.). Disposal

}

In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-

lated characteristic data.

} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act). 2.3 For your safety WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to substituting an actuator from the interlocking and guard locking system Substituting an actuator for an inappropriate actuator may lead to serious in-

jury and death. You should prevent the interlocking and guard locking system from being manipulated with an inappropriate actuator. Keep the substitute actuator in a safe place and protect it from unau-

thorised access. If substitute actuators are used, these must be installed as described under Installation [

29]

If the original actuators are replaced with substitute actuators, the ori-

ginal actuators must be destroyed before disposal.

} Do not remove the connector's protective cap until you are just about to connect the unit. This will prevent potential contamination. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 9 Overview 3 3.1 Overview Unit features

} Safe guard locking for swing gates and sliding gates

} Safe interlocking (position monitoring)

} Transponder technology

}

} Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD) 2 safety outputs Safety Device Diagnostics can be used to poll sensor information, to perform ac-

tions and to read configuration parameters Manipulation protection in accordance with ISO 14119 (chap. 7.2.d) is possible by verifying the short name of the actuator through the controller via SDD communica-

tion

} Diagnostic input for Y1 for Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD)

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 for Safety Device Diagnostics

} Monitoring of shorts between the safety outputs

} Guard locking element keeps the safety gate from being opened unintentionally

} Auxiliary release for opening the safety gate

}

} Suitable for left and right hinged safety gates

} Pilz type of coding: Fully coded/uniquely coded

} M12, 8-pin male connector

}

1 signal output LEDs:

Supply voltage/fault Status of actuator Status of guard locking Input lights up yellow (without function)

} The bolt in the actuator can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing before the actuator is installed. As a result, the actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally.

} The safety switch PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 can be expanded using a stationary or external escape release (see Order reference: Accessories [

The stationary escape release can be expanded by 25 mm max. two times. The external escape releases are available with push/pull cables between 1.5and4m in length (grading 50cm). 66]). 3.2 Scope of supply

} Scope of supply PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 Safety switch PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 10 Function description 4 4.1 Function description Structure The interlocking and guard locking system prevents the safety gates to the danger zone from being opened while there is any hazard within the danger zone (machine movement, voltage, ...). The safety outputs may have a high or low signal, depending on the position of the actuator and the signal path of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). Gate closed Gate open Safety outputs 12 and 22 Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

} Actuator is detected and

} Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low.

} Diagnostic input Y1 If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is automatically activ-

ated and data is read. If no fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is not used.

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 The status of the actuator is output. If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the signal output/diagnostic output for the writing of data is activated. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 11 Safety switchActuatorSafety switchActuator Function description 4.2 Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation)

}

If there is a low signal at safety inputs S31 and S41, the guard locking pin does not change its position.

} Guard locking may only be deactivated once the hazardous movement has been com-

pleted. Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics

} The safety inputs S31 and S41 have a high signal within max. 500 ms after the receipt of the guard locking activation. Guard locking is activated through a high signal (length 350 - 400 ms ) at inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse (length 350 - 400 ms ) at these inputs deactivates guard locking. 4.2.1 Activation with specification of direction

} The guard locking is activated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S31 before S41).

} The guard locking is deactivated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S41 before S31). Legend tmax Maximum time between the rising edges from S31 and S42 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 12 S31S41tmaxGuard lockingS31S41tmaxGuard locking Function description 4.2.2 4.3 Activation without specification of direction

} The guard locking changes its state when the time between the rising edges from S31 and S41<20ms. Safety Device Diagnostics Safety Device Diagnostics is an option that can be selected independently of the safety-re-

lated wiring. When using the Safety Device Diagnostics, up to 16 sensors can be connected as a sub-

scriber to a fieldbus module. The communication of the sensors with the fieldbus module is automatically built up again with each new supply of the supply voltage. As a result, a sensor can be exchanged, e.g. when servicing, without the need for special measures. An exchange can be detected via the fieldbus module e.g. through the serial number.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module:

Poll information of the sensors (examples: what sensor in the series has switched, at what point could there be an open circuit in the series connection) Read configuration parameters of the sensor (examples: Number of teach-in pro-

cesses remaining, serial number of the switch) Perform actions (example: poll updated actuator name) Selectively activate or deactivate guard locking of individual PSEN ml within a series connection The results of the sensor diagnostics can be checked already during the installation phase via the display in the fieldbus module, without the need to connect the fieldbus module to the network.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module for simple wiring:

Information is passed on via the fieldbus module directly to the network Mappings of the signal outputs to the sensor are automated by the SDD. This prevents wiring errors and an expansion or reduction of the sensors is possible without the need to change existing wiring. Wiring in accordance with IP20: Rapid installation in the control cabined is enabled. Further information on Safety Device Diagnostics can be found in Additional documents that apply [

} Series connection of diagnostics with Safety Device Diagnostics 8]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 13 Function description 4.4 Operating modes The safety switch can be used in various operating modes.

} Operation without safety device diagnostics Standard operating mode After every restart the safety switch is in operation without Safety Device Dia-

gnostics. No communication with Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Safety switch supplies diagnostic data to Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with active use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Activate/deactivate the guard locking by a combination of a Safety Device Dia-

gnostics command and the status of the safety inputs S31 and S41 (S31 and S41 must have a high signal). The safety requirements are guaranteed by the signals S31 and S41 (the fieldbus for Safety Device Diagnostics communication is not safe).

} Operation with specification of direction when activating/deactivating he guard locking A specification of direction can be used to control the change of the guard locking status. Toggling: The safety switch changes with each simultaneous controlling of S31 and S41 the guard locking status (activated <-> deactivated). Force Direction: The safety switch is selectively activated or deactivated by offset activation of the rising edges of S31 and S41. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 14 Y1Y32Y1Y321. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlFieldbus module Function description Timing diagrams Fig.: Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] Gate is closed

[3] Guard locking is activated by the safety control system

[4] Guard locking is activated

[5] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[6] Outputs will be deactivated

[7] Guard locking will be deactivated

[8] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 15

[7]S31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][4][5][8][t1][t1][t2][6][t2]Y1[2][3]SDD command guard lockingGuard lockingActuator Function description Fig.: Passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] Gate is closed

[3] Guard locking is activated

[4] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[5] Outputs will be deactivated

[6] Guard locking will be deactivated

[7] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 16 S31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][4][5][6][8][7][t1][t1][t2][t2]Y1[2][3]Guard lockingActuator Function description 4.5 Block diagram 4.6 Auxiliary release The auxiliary release enables guard locking to be opened from the access side to the danger zone. The safety switch has auxiliary releases on three sides. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 17 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLockPowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1&&Function description INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Operation [

49]) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Legend

[1] Auxiliary release screw Torx T10

[2] Security screw Torx T10, sealed with varnish when delivered Mode of operation:

1. Remove the security screw [2] using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] half a turn anti-clockwise using a Torx T10 screw-

driver. The guard locking pin is displaced and the bolt is released. The safety gate to the danger zone can be opened. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 18

[1][2]Function description 4.6.1 Recommissioning Recommission PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] (see Figure [

Torx T10 screwdriver. 18]) half a turn clockwise using a 2. Re-insert the security screw [2] (see Figure [

3. Seal the security screw with varnish. 4. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 5. Carry out a function test on the safety switch and actuator. The safety function may only 18]) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. be checked by qualified personnel. INFORMATION If the auxiliary release screw is not turned back correctly after use, the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 switches to a fault condition. 4.7 Prevent restart To prevent the machine restarting (unintentionally) while there is someone inside the danger zone, a padlock can be attached via the through hole on the actuator (see diagram). As a result the actuator cannot engage with the safety switch, guard locking is not activated and the machine is prevented from starting. Legend

[1] Through hole on the actuator for attaching a padlock

[2] Padlock

[3] Actuator If the actuator is to blocked using several locks in parallel, a multiple lock can be used (e.g. Brady Lockout device, article no.852439). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 19

[1][2][3]Function description 4.8 Escape release Distinction between escape release and emergency release

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from outside the hazardous area.

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from within the hazardous area and it corresponds to an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed within the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed outside the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. Legend

[1] Escape release stationary

[2] Escape release externally

[3] Tension pressure cables in lengths of 1.50m to 4m

[4] Button of the escape release pin

[5] Escape release pin INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Operation [

49]) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 20

[1][2][3][4][5]Function description Mode of operation If in the hazardous area the button of the escape release pin [4] is pressed towards the safety gate, the escape release impacts directly on the auxiliary release of the safety switch and the auxiliary release unlocks the safety gate. The safety gate can be opened immedi-

ately, enabling the operator to leave the danger zone. There is a low signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 if the escape release was operated. Scope

} Scope of supply stationary escape release 1 escape release stationary 1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk

} Scope of supply external escape release 66]) 1 escape release external with installed push/pull cables (see Order reference:

Accessories [

1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk 4.8.1 Recommissioning 1. Pull back the button of the escape release pin. 2. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 3. Carry out a function test using the escape release. The safety function may only be checked by qualified personnel. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 21 Wiring 5 5.1 5.2 Wiring Important information

} Hand-tighten the connector.

}

Information given in the Technical details [

60] must be followed. Pin assignment, connector and cable 8-pin M12 connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 2)

+24 V UB Safety output channel 1 Safety output channel 2 Signal output/diagnostic output Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 1) 0 V UB Diagnostics input Terminal designation S41 Cable colour (Pilz cable) white A1 12 22 Y32 S31 A2 Y1 Brown Green Yellow grey Pink Blue Red NOTICE The colour marking for the connection lead only applies for the cable that Pilz supplies as an accessory 5.3 EMC requirements

} Ensure the wiring and EMC requirements of EN 60204-1 are met.

} UL requirement: The supply voltage to the safety switch must be protected with a quick-

acting fuse (see Technical details [

60]).

} The inputs and outputs of the safety switch must have a protective separation to voltages over 60 V AC.

} The power supply must meet the regulations for extra low voltages with protective sep-

aration (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN60204-1. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 22 Wiring INFORMATION Only use safety relays with a 24 VDC supply voltage. Safety relays with a wide-range power supply or in AC device versions have internal potential isolation and are not suitable as evaluation devices. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 23 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6 6.1 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Important information Make sure that the selected evaluation device has the following properties:

}

2-channel with feasibility monitoring Both OSSDs must change switch state synchronously. In particular, the evaluation device must monitor that the state of both OSSDs was "Gate unlocked" before both re-

turn to the "Gate locked" state and vice-versa.

} OSSD signals are evaluated through 2 channels

} The state of the OSSDs must be tested before and after safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated (solenoid operation) (see Timing diagram [

15]) WARNING!

Potential loss of safety function due to failure to test for a safe condition Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. Use an evaluation device/safety system to test whether the plant is in a safe condition. Do not operate the solenoid of the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 via S31/S41 unless the plant is in a safe condition.

} The use of Safety Device Diagnostics is described in the System Description "Safety Device Diagnostics". 6.2 Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Use in PL e (Cat. 4) applications

} Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) have 2-channel operation via safe out-

puts, which are suitable for PL e (Cat. 4) applications 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Monitoring of shorts across signal cables through activation of guard locking Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 24 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 3) applications

}

2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) via relay out-

puts 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Exclusion of shorts across signal cables through appropriate measures (e.g. protected cable layout, see EN ISO 13849-2) Legend

[1] Protected cable layout Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 25 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 1Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 124 V[1]Programmable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 2) applications

}

}

}

1-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) 2-channel processing of safety outputs 1-channel operation for interconnected safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), with 1A 6.3 Single connection Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 26 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock RequestProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking24 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1ActuatorSafety switchProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.4 Connection to Pilz evaluation devices The safety switch PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 can be connected to Pilz evaluation devices, for ex-

ample. Suitable Pilz evaluation devices are, for example:

} PNOZmulti for safety gate monitoring Configure the switch in the PNOZmulti Configurator with switch type 3.

} PSS for safety gate monitoring with standard function block SB064, SB066 or FS_SafetyGate

} PSSuniversal PLC for safety gate monitoring with function block FS_SafetyGate The correct connection to the respective evaluation device is described in the operating manual for the evaluation device. Make sure that the connection is made in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual for the selected evaluation device. Connection to PNOZmulti is illustrated by way of example. 6.4.1 Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 27 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSEN ml0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)TxRxActivation of guard locking via SDD ES module Teaching in the actuator 7 7.1 Teaching in the actuator PSEN ml 2.1 Teaching in the actuator for the first time:

The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 60]) is To teach in a new actuator:

} A maximum of 8 learning procedures are possible. 1. The actuator that is to be taught in must be brought into the safety switch's response range as the only transponder. As soon as the actuator is detected, the "Safety Gate"

LED will flash yellow. 2. After 20 s has elapsed, the "Safety Gate" LED turns to quick yellow flashes. Trigger a system reset in the next 120 s by interrupting the power supply. 3. When the supply voltage is switched back on, the learning procedure is complete and the number of permitted additional learning procedures is reduced by 1. NOTICE The actuator must not be removed during the learning procedure. This actuator cannot be retaught on the same safety switch. 7.2 PSEN ml 2.2 The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 60]) is NOTICE No other actuator may be taught in once this actuator has been taught. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 28 Installation 8 8.1 Installation Important information INFORMATION Refer to the guidelines for designing guards and integrating interlocks with guard locking in ENISO14120. NOTICE Install the safety switch and actuator so that the possibilities of defeat are reduced to a minimum (see guidelines for reducing the possibilities for de-

feating interlocking devices in EN ISO 14119). NOTICE Install safety switch and actuator so that it is not possible to reach through with hand or finger.

} The safety switch and actuator should be installed opposite each other in parallel.

} Make sure that the actuator makes complete contact with the mounting surface.

} Make sure that the at least one of the auxiliary release/escape releases can be oper-

ated after installation.

} For a minimum screw depth of 6 mm, M5 screws with resistance class 8.8 should be used to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

60].

} Use non-removable flat head locking screws to attach the safety switch and actuator

(e.g. cheese-head or pan head screws) or rivets.

} Use the same type of screw to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Prevent self-loosening of the fastening elements on the safety switch and actuator, On the safety switch: through torque (see Technical details [

On the actuator: through torque (see Technical details [

60]) 60]) and bonded screw retention

} Make sure that the actuator does not present a risk.

} The mounting surfaces for safety switches and actuators can have a max. unevenness of 0.5 mm.

} Prevent the safety switch and actuator being exposed to heavy shock or vibration.

} The fastening of safety switch and actuator has to be sufficiently stable to ensure the proper operation of the safety switch and the actuator. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 29 Installation 8.2 Tapped hole

} To fix the safety switch at the three possible mounting positions, there are 3 drill holes on 3 sides. As a result, the safety switch can be installed on the frames of left and right hinged slid-

ing gates and swing gates. If necessary use a Mounting plate [

bracket [

Different holding forces arise, based on the installation. Fixing screws in parallel to actuator [

38] (see Order reference: Accessories [

39] or Mounting 66]). 32]:

Holding forceFZh=7.500 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=15.000 N Fixing screws side-on to actuator [

33]:

Holding forceFZh=5.000 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=10.000 N INFORMATION Please note that the stated holding forces only apply when installed without a mounting bracket. The holding forces when installed with a mounting bracket can be found in the table "Technical details for mounting bracket [

65]". The tapped holes must have a depth of at least 6 mm. Installation of safety switch Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, no mounting plate Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, with mounting plate Tapped hole Tapped holes for four M5 screws on the mounting surface. Tapped holes for two M8 screws on the mounting surface, for attaching the mount-

ing plate. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 30 Installation Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, no mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, with mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Actuator, no mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M5 screws (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 31 3119,2193,54,5 8,5 5,35 1048 Installation Actuator, with mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M6 screws (see Dimensions).

(Diagram: order no. 570 492 as example) 8.3 Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Use four M5 screws to attach the switch to the mounting surface.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

60]. Fig.: Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Legend

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 32 6,5XY[3][3][1][2]Installation 8.4 Install fixing screws side-on to actuator

[1] Front of safety switch

[2] Actuator Use four screws [1] to fix the safety switch to the mount-

ing surface. Fully tighten the four screws

[1] on the safety switch. Torque setting: Please note the information provided un-

der Technical details [

60]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 33

[1][2][1][1][1][1]Installation 8.5 Centre the bolt in the actuator housing The bolt must be centred in the actuator housing in order to maintain the distances on set-

tling gates. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing (see diagram). Bolt centred within the actuator hous-

ing Bolt not centred within the actuator housing 8.6 Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 The actuator can be installed vertically on a gate (see Figure [

ator horizontally, the bolt can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing prior to installation. 1. On the housing skin [3] in the actuator housing, press down the spring plate [1] on both 11]). To install the actu-

sides of the bolt and keep the plate held down. 2. Rotate the bolt in the housing skin by 90 in the required direction ([2]). Legend

[1] Spring plate in the housing skin

[2] Bolt, can be rotated 90

[3] Housing skin Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 34

[1][2][3]Installation 3. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing [

34]. 8.7 Installation on sliding gate Legend

[1] Safety switch, installed on gate frame

[2] Actuator with mounting bracket (available as Accessory [

sliding gate 66]), installed on 1. Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

32] or side-on to actuator [

33] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 35

[1][2]Installation 8.8 Installation on swing gate Fig.: Swing gate with internal and external hinge Legend

[1]

[2]

1. Safety switch on gate frame Actuator, installed on swing gate Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

32] or side-on to actuator [

33] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. The actuator should engage smoothly into the safety switch. Install the safety switch horizontally at a swing gate Please note:

Depending on the installation boundary conditions, a larger gate radius may be required

(see diagram). Please contact Pilz when smaller gate radiuses are required. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 36

[1][2][2]Installation Make sure that a slight shift of the rotation point of the door is maintained when installing the actuator. Legend R The distance of the upper part of the safety switch from the rotation point of the door X Parallel shift of the actuator Tilt angle when installing the actuator

} Tilt the actuator during installation by 10 in the following situations:

50 mm < X < 75 mm and R < 600 mm X < 50 mm and R < 500 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 37 Installation 8.9 Installation with mounting bracket 1. Use two M6 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the gate. The position of the drill holes can be taken from the section entitled Dimensions. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the mounting bracket. Fig.: Actuator, installed on mounting bracket Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 38 Installation 8.10 Installation with mounting plate 1. Attach the mounting plate to the swing gate/sliding gate. 2. Use four M5 screws to fix the safety switch [

32] to the mounting plate. Fig.: Safety switch, installed on mounting plate 8.11 Installing the escape release 8.11.1 Important information WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to the incorrect installation of the escape re-

lease!

If the button of the escape release pin is accessible from the outside, the guard locking device can be released from the outside and the safety gates opened, although the hazardous machine is switched on. Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. The escape release should be installed so that it is only accessible from in-

side the danger zone.

} The button of the escape release pin must be impossible to reach from a position out-

side the protected area.

} Make sure that the escape release cannot be operated unintentionally. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 39 Installation

} Prevent the effect of transverse forces on the escape release.

} Secure the screw joints with a with a threadlocker.

} Ensure that the button of the escape release pin is clearly visible and that is it not covered.

} Make sure that the min. bending radius of the push/pull cable of60mm is maintained when using the external escape release.

} Make sure that the button of the escape release pin does not present a risk.

} The mounting surface has to completely cover the bottom of the escape release hous-

ing. The bottom of the escape release housing must not be accessible after installation. 8.11.2 Installation positions for escape release The stationary escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in three dif-

ferent directions each. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 40

[1][2]Installation The external escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in four different directions each. The push/pull cable can be led out on different sides. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back 8.11.3 Installation stationary escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 41

[1][2]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The button of the escape release pin can be removed for the installation (e.g. when the escape release pin is to be run through a wall). The button of the escape release pin must be secured again with a threadlocker and hand-tightened after escape release in-

stallation is complete

} To bridge larger distances the escape release pin can be extended by a max. of 25mm two times (see Order reference: Accessories [

66]). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 42

[1][2][3]Installation Legend

[1] Button of the escape release pin

[2] Escape release pin 8.11.4 Installation external escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 43

[2][1]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 44

[1][2][3]Installation 4. Screw the housing of the escape release with the screws [1] to a mounting surface with 6 - 6,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The screws of the push/pull cable [2] can be loosened to make installation easier (e.g. when the push/pull cable is to be run through a wall). The screws must be fixed with 6 -

6,5 Nm after the escape release is installed. Legend

[1] Screwing the escape release to the mounting area

[2] Screwing the cable Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 45

[1][1][2]Installation 8.11.5 Uninstalling the escape release If the push/pull cable is to be run through a conduit pipe, the cable has to be uninstalled at the escape release first. Prerequisites

} The conduit pipe must have a diameter of at least 12mm. Procedure:

1. Lift off the cover [1] (e.g. with a screwdriver with a flat blade). Legend

[1] Cover

[2] Nut M10 x 0,75

[3] Fork head

[4] Slot nut 2. Loosen the nut [2]. 3. Pull out the push/pull cable with the slot nut [4] and remove the slot nut and the nut [2]

from the cable. 4. Run the cable through the conduit pipe. 5. Push the nut [2] and the slot nut [4] over the fork head [3] back on the cable. 6. Push the cable with the fork head [3] on the fork in the escape release. The slot nut [4]

must be fitted into the nut again. 7. Tighten the nut [2] with 6 - 6,5 Nm. 8. Put the lid [1] back on. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 46

[1][2][4][3]Adjustment 9 Adjustment Please note:

} Safety switch and actuator must be aligned correctly

} Distances are maintained as stated in the following diagram

} Actuator is centred (see Centre bolt in actuator housing [

} Always test the function with a connected evaluation device.

} When installing an external or stationary escape release, check the function of the es-

34]) cape release with a connected evaluation device. View from above View from the side Perspective view

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Max. lateral offset

+/-3,0 mm

[4] Max. vertical offset

+/-3,0 mm

[5] Max. angular offset around the X axis +/-2,0 deg

[6] Max. angular offset around the Y axis +/-2,5 deg

[7] Max. angular offset around the Z axis +/-7,5 deg

[8] Max. offset in closing direction

+/-2 mm Attach safety switch and actuator Once the safety switch and actuator are correctly aligned, the actuator's screw connection must be tightened. 1. Tighten up one M5 screw. 2. For applications with increased safety requirements (e.g. SIL CL 2 PL d), swap the second M5 screw for an M5 locking screw. 3. Tighten up the M5 screw or M5 locking screw. Please note the max. torque setting stated in the Technical details [

60]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 47

[7][3][1][2][6][8][4][2][1][5][2][1]Operation 10 Operation NOTICE The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be checked by qualified personnel. Status indicators:

}

}

}

}

"Device" LED illuminates green: The unit is ready for operation

"Safety Gate" LED lights up yellow: Actuator is within the response range

"Lock" LED lights up green: Guard locking active

"Input" LED lights up yellow: The unit is ready for operation Legend:

LED off LED on LED flashes (500 ms on, 500 ms off) LED flashes quickly (50 ms on, 950 ms off) LED flashes very quickly (25 ms on, 475 ms off) 10.1 Normal mode LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status Green Yellow Green Green Yellow Green Yellow PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 is started Green Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking deactivated Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking activated Green Yel-

low Yel-

low Yel-

low Yel-

low Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 48 Operation Warnings LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Display not defin-

itive Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detected, guard locking cannot be activated / deac-

tivated The supply voltage to safety inputs S31 and S41 was switched back on before the auxili-

ary release screw was turned back. Safety switch active despite over or under-

voltage Remedy / meas-

ure Check the actu-

ator's alignment [

to the safety switch. 47]

Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on (see Recommissionin g [

19]). Check the supply voltage. If safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated or de-

activated while an undervoltage warning is present, the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 49 Operation 10.2 Error display LED status Switch status Remedy / measure Device Safety Gate Input Lock Red Yellow Display not definitive Safety switch de-

activated due to under or over-

voltage Yel-

low Check the supply voltage and switch the supply voltage off and then on again. Previous LED display is retained Display not definitive Safety outputs in fault condition Auxiliary release/

escape release activated Display not definitive Error Safety switch does not start Check the wiring and switch the supply voltage off and then on again.

} Auxiliary release: Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on

(see Recommissioning [

19]).

} Escape release: Pull the button of the escape release pin back again and then switch on the voltage supply again (see Re-

commissioning under escape release [

21]). Please contact Pilz. Change the safety switch. Red Red Red Green Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Wrong actuator Use the actuator PSEN ml 2.1. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 50 Checks and maintenance 11 Checks and maintenance Regular inspection of the switch function is required to guarantee the trouble-free, long-

term function. If the interlock and guard locking system is only used rarely (opening and closing the safety gate and activating/deactivating the guard locking device), a manual function test is re-

quired. The correct function of the device should be checked at regular intervals and after each er-

ror. Test intervals in accordance with EN ISO 14119:

}

}

for SIL CL 3/PL e at least 1x per month for SIL CL 2/PL d at least 1x per year The Appendix contains a Check list [

69], which should help you perform the test. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 51 Checks and maintenance Visual inspection:

} Check that the seal on the security screw on the auxiliary release is intact. If the seal is not intact, make sure that the security screw is inserted and use varnish to seal the se-

curity screw.

} Check the safety switch and actuator for damage.

} Make sure that the safety switch and actuator are firmly secured.

} Check the offset of the safety switch and actuator. Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset Max. vertical offset

} Check that the wiring is correct.

} Remove any dirt from the safety switch and actuator. Function test

} The actuator is detected and at the safety outputs 12 and 22 there is a high signal after detection of the actuator.

} The guard locking device can be activated/deactivated when the safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated.

} Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

Actuator is detected and Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Escape release

} Test whether the button of the escape release pin can be detected and reached.

} Check the function of the escape release. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 52 Dimensions 12 Dimensions Safety switch Distance between safety switch mounting surface and actuator mounting surface Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 53 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,52953674069,5 Dimensions Mounting plate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570490 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 54 25512,543,25193,5204,531280(12,5)n8,5M5n8,5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for sliding gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570492 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 55 40301011,7540n6,5n6,563,5101060207,7548M5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for swing gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570493 Fig.: Order no.: 570494 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 56 69,5689,54863,569,515,58,56,54079.5689,569,515,58,56,5404863,5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for sliding gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570495 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 57 581040983011,754015063,5n6,525487,7520M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for swing gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570496 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 58 19769,517768,56,5123150M5205463,525 Dimensions Fig.: Order no.: 570497 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 59 19779,565415063,5251771236,58,520M5 570402 CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed Transponder Transponder 570404 Technical details 13 Technical details General Approvals Sensor's mode of operation Coding level in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Design in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Classification in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Pilz coding type Transponder Frequency band Max. transmitter output Electrical data Supply voltage Voltage Kind Voltage tolerance Output of external power supply

(DC) Max. switching frequency Magnet. supply voltage Max. solenoid current t <150 ms Max. cable capacitance at the safety outputs High 4 PDDB fully coded 570402 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570402 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A No-load, PNOZ with relay con-

tacts PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS 40 nF 70 nF Max. inrush current impulse Current pulse, A1 Pulse duration, A1 5 A 0,0002 ms Max. unit fuse protection in accord-

ance with UL No-load current Inputs Number Voltage at inputs Current at solenoid input Semiconductor outputs OSSD safety outputs Signal outputs Switching current per output Breaking capacity per output 3 A 40 mA 570402 2 24 V DC 500 mA 570402 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W High 4 PDDB uniquely coded 570404 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570404 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 570404 2 24 V DC 500 mA 570404 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 60 Technical details 570402 No yes 100 A 1 V Semiconductor outputs Potential isolation from system voltage Short circuit-proof Residual current at outputs Voltage drop at OSSDs Conditional rated short circuit cur-

rent Lowest operating current Utilisation category in accordance DC-13 with EN 60947-1 Times 570402 Test pulse duration, safety outputs 450 s Switch-on delay 100 A 1 mA after UB is applied Actuator typ. Actuator max. Delay-on de-energisation Actuator typ. Actuator max. 1,1 s 30 ms 50 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms Risk time in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Supply interruption before de-ener-

20 ms gisation Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. 20 ms Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Re-

quest Processing time activate/deactivate guard locking Environmental data Temperature of metal surface at ambient temperature: 25 C Ambient temperature 40 C 100 ms 570402 350 - 400 ms In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-14 Temperature range Storage temperature 0 - 60 C In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-1/-2 Temperature range

-25 - 70 C Climatic suitability In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-78 Humidity EMC Vibration 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 570404 No yes 100 A 1 V 100 A 1 mA DC-13 570404 450 s 1,1 s 30 ms 50 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 20 ms 350 - 400 ms 100 ms 570404 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 60 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-6 Frequency Amplitude 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 61 Technical details Environmental data Shock stress 570402 In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-27 Number of shocks Acceleration Duration 3 30g 11 ms Airgap creepage Overvoltage category Pollution degree Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Protection type Housing In accordance with UL Mechanical data Length of cable with connector Min. bending radius (fixed perman-

ently) K1 Min. bending radius (moving) K1 Cable diameter K1 Escape release available Mechanical life Holding force FZh III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570402 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,2 mm No 1,000,000 cycles Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator 7.500 N 5.000 N Holding force F1Max in accord-

ance with ISO 14119 Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator Latching force Max. vertical offset Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset around the X axis Max. angular offset around the Y axis Max. angular offset around the Z axis Max. offset in closing direction Max. retract speed of actuator Actuator 1 Min. distance between safety switches Connection type Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 570404 EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570404 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,2 mm No 1,000,000 cycles 7.500 N 5.000 N 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 0 mm M12, 8-pin male connector 0 mm M12, 8-pin male connector 62 Technical details Mechanical data Cable Material 570402 LiYY 8 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 570404 LiYY 8 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 6 - 6,5 Nm Max. torque setting for fixing screws Max. torque setting escape release 1,2 - 1,5 Nm Max. torque setting for mounting plate Max. torque setting for mounting bracket Min. gate radius Dimensions 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 22 - 24 Nm Height Width Depth Actuator dimensions Height Width Depth Weight of safety switch Weight of actuator Weight 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g 6 - 6,5 Nm 1,2 - 1,5 Nm 22 - 24 Nm 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g Where standards are undated, the 2015-11 latest editions shall apply. 13.1 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I The following tables describe the classes and specific values of the product interface and the classes of interfaces compatible with it. The classification is described in the ZVEI posi-

tion paper "Classification of Binary 24 V Interfaces - Functional Safety aspects covered by dynamic testing". Solenoid inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

16 Ohm

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 500 s 1,5 nF Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 63 Technical details Safe 1-pole HL outputs Source Safety switch Source parameters Test impulse duration Rated current Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

-

-

Drain Evaluation device Typ.

-

-

-

C1, C2 Max. 450 s 0,1 A 70 nF 13.2 Safety characteristic data NOTICE You must comply with the safety characteristic data in order to achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine. Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

PL d 1-ch. guard locking 2-ch. guard PL e locking 2-ch. OSSD PL e Cat. 2 Cat. 4 Cat. 4 SIL CL 2 4,22E-09 SIL CL 3 SIL CL 3 4,22E-09 2,38E-09 20 20 20 All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety characteristic data. INFORMATION A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values. NOTICE Be sure that you observe the mechanical life. The safety characteristic data are only valid as long as the values of mechanical life are met. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 64 Supplementary data 14 14.1 Supplementary data Radio approval 14.2 Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit 570492 CE 570492 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 420 g 570493 CE 570493 3000 N 6000 N 420 g 570494 CE 570494 3000 N 6000 N 445 g 14.3 Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit 570495 CE 570495 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 3000 N Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 6000 N 260 g 570496 CE 570496 3000 N 6000 N 600 g 570497 CE 570497 3000 N 6000 N 630 g Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 65 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML Order reference 15 15.1 Order reference System Product type PSEN ml b 2.1 unit PSEN ml b 2.2 unit PSEN ml b 2.1 switch PSEN ml 2.1 actuator 15.2 Accessories Installation accessories Features Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, fully coded Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, uniquely coded Mechanical safety switch with guard locking, fully coded Actuator, fully coded Connection type M12, 8-pin con-

nector Order no. 570402 M12, 8-pin con-

nector 570404 M12, 8-pin con-

nector 570403 570481 Product type PSEN ml escape re-

lease PSEN ml escape re-

lease extension PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 1.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 4.0m PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door Features Escape release stationary Extension escape release stationary 25 mm Escape release with push/pull cable 1.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 2 m Escape release external with push/pull cable 2.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.0 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 4 m Mounting plate for installing the safety switch, with 4 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head locking screw, M5x40 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x16 Order no. 570 460 570 462 570 470 570 471 570 472 570 473 570 474 570 475 570490 570 492 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 66 Order reference Product type PSEN ml bracket swinging door 70 PSEN ml bracket swinging door 80 PSEN ml door handle sliding door PSEN ml door handle swinging door 70 PSEN ml door handle swinging door 80 PSEN screw set bracket swinging door PSEN screw set bracket sliding door Features Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x16. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a swing gate Order no. 570 493 570 494 570 495 570 496 570 497 570498 Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a sliding gate 570499 Cable Product type PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 3m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 5m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf, 20m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 30m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 0.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1.5m Features 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0.5 m 1 m 1.5 m Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 540 321 540 320 540 319 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight 540 326 540 345 540 346 540 333 540 347 67 Order reference Features 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m Product type PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 2m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 20m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 30m PSEN ml / PSENcs Y junction M12 540 341 540 340 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector 540 342 540 343 540 344 570 489 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 68 Appendix 16 Appendix The following check list is intended as a guide to provide support during commissioning, re-

commissioning and the prescribed regular testing of the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2. Note that the check list is not intended to replace the plant-specific safety analysis required for commissioning/recommissioning, nor the resulting inspections and actions. INFORMATION Commissioning, recommissioning and regular inspection may only be car-

ried out by qualified personnel. We recommend that you keep the completed check list and store it with the machine docu-

mentation for reference. Date Action Safety switch Number Actuator Number OK Not OK Notes Signature Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 69 EC declaration of conformity 17 EC declaration of conformity This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-

chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads. Authorised representative: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfildern, Germany Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 70 Front cover y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

8 1 0 2

, 8 0

-

N E

-

5 9 8 3 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnical support is available from Pilz round the clock. AmericasBrazil+55 11 97569-2804Canada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexico+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsiaChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281South Korea+82 31 450 0680Australia+61 3 95600621EuropeAustria+43 1 7986263-0Belgium, Luxembourg+32 9 3217575France+33 3 88104000Germany+49 711 3409-444Ireland+353 21 4804983Italy, Malta+39 0362 1826711Scandinavia+45 74436332Spain+34 938497433Switzerland+41 62 88979-30The Netherlands+31 347 320477Turkey+90 216 5775552United Kingdom+44 1536 462203You can reach our international hotline on: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PAScong, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, THE SPIRIT OF SAFETY are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using ecological materials and energy-saving technologies. Oces and production facilities are ecologically designed, environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz oers sustainability, plus the security of using energy-ecient products and environmentally-friendly solutions.Pilz GmbH & Co. KG Felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostldern, GermanyTel.: +49 711 3409-0 Fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.com200XXXX-EN-0X0-0-2-3-000, 2017-00 Printed in Germany Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2017

 

 

PSEN ml b 2.2

} PSEN sensor technology Operating Manual-1003895-EN-08 Preface This document is the original document. All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made for the user's internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documenta-

tion will be gratefully received. Source code from third-party manufacturers or open source software has been used for some components. The relevant licence information is available on the Internet on the Pilz homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. SD means Secure Digital Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 Validity of documentation Using the documentation Definition of symbols Safety 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 Intended use Safety regulations Safety assessment Additional documents that apply Use of qualified personnel Warranty and liability Disposal For your safety Overview 3.1 3.2 Unit features Scope of supply Function description 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 Structure Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) Activation with specification of direction Activation without specification of direction Safety Device Diagnostics Operating modes Block diagram Auxiliary release Recommissioning Prevent restart Escape release Recommissioning Wiring 5.1 5.2 5.3 Important information Pin assignment, connector and cable EMC requirements Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 Important information Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Single connection Connection to Pilz evaluation devices Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Section 7 Teaching in the actuator 7.1 PSEN ml 2.1 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 5 5 5 5 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 17 17 19 19 20 21 22 22 22 22 24 24 24 26 27 27 28 28 3 Contents Section 8 7.2 PSEN ml 2.2 Installation 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 Important information Tapped hole Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Install fixing screws side-on to actuator Centre the bolt in the actuator housing Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 Installation on sliding gate Installation on swing gate Installation with mounting bracket Installation with mounting plate Installing the escape release Important information Installation positions for escape release Installation stationary escape release Installation external escape release Uninstalling the escape release Section 9 Adjustment Section 10 Operation 10.1 10.2 Normal mode Error display Section 11 Checks and maintenance Section 12 Dimensions Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Technical details 13.1 13.2 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I Safety characteristic data Supplementary data 14.1 14.2 14.3 Radio approval Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit Order reference 15.1 System Accessories 15.2 Section 16 Appendix Section 17 EC declaration of conformity Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 28 29 29 30 32 33 34 34 35 36 38 39 39 39 40 41 43 46 47 48 48 50 51 53 60 63 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 69 70 4 Introduction 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Validity of documentation This documentation is valid for the product PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 from Version 2.0. This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and provides guidelines on how to connect the product. Using the documentation This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-

erence. Definition of symbols Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:

DANGER!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. WARNING!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. CAUTION!

This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. NOTICE This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-

aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-

ance. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 5 Introduction INFORMATION This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-

tures. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 6 Safety 2 2.1 Safety Intended use The safety gate system is used for interlocking and guard locking swing gates and sliding gates. The safety gate system can be operated in two ways:

} Unlocking with condition The safety gate system prevents the safety gate from being unlocked while there is any hazard within the danger zone.

} Unlocking without condition The operator can unlock the safety gate system at any time. After starting the unlock-

ing, the guard locking creates a stop command. The time required to unlock the inter-

locking guard has to be longer than the time required to stop the hazardous machine function. The hazardous machine function may only be executed under the following conditions:

} There is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 and

} There is a low signal at safety outputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/Un-

lock Request 2). Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) may only be operated under the following condition:

} Plant is in a safe condition Make sure that this is the case with an AND operation in the safety system immediately before the output is operated. The safety switch meets the requirements in accordance with:

} EN 60947-5-3 with the actuator PSEN ml 2.1: PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Coding level High, type 4 The safety switch may only be used with the corresponding actuator PSEN ml 2.1. The safety level PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 is only achieved if

}

} The solenoid has 2-channel operation via safe, tested outputs, suitable for PL e (Cat. the safety outputs use 2-channel processing 4)/SIL CL 3 applications. With 1-channel operation of the safety inputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/

Unlock Request 2) it is only possible to achieve safety level PLd(Cat.2)/SILCL2. Foreseeable misuse

} Safety switches and actuators of the safety gate system PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 must not be used as mechanical limit stops

} Use of the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 under corrosive environmental conditions (cooling emul-

sions, surface treatment, gases, ) Please contact Pilz. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 7 Safety 2.2 2.2.1 Safety regulations Safety assessment Before using a device it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the Machinery Directive. Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-

quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-

isational standpoint. 2.2.2 Additional documents that apply 2.2.3 Please read and take note of the following documents. Only for use of the Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD):

} Operating manual for the fieldbus module, for example SDD ES ETH or SDD ES PROFIBUS

} System description "Safety Device Diagnostics"

For the use of passive junctions:

} Operating manual of a passive junction, for example:

PSEN ix2 F4 code PSEN ix2 F8 code PDP67 F 4 code You will need to be conversant with the information in these documents in order to fully un-

derstand this operating manual. Use of qualified personnel The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned by competent persons. A competent person is a qualified and knowledgeable person who, because of their train-

ing, experience and current professional activity, has the specialist knowledge required. To be able to inspect, assess and operate devices, systems and machines, the person has to be informed of the state of the art and the applicable national, European and international laws, directives and standards. It is the companys responsibility only to employ personnel who

} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-

tion,

} Have read and understood the information provided in the section entitled Safety

} Have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the spe-

cific application. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 8 Safety 2.2.4 2.2.5 Warranty and liability All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if

} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended,

} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual,

} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified,

} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB boards, soldering work etc.). Disposal

}

In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-

lated characteristic data.

} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act). 2.3 For your safety WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to substituting an actuator from the interlocking and guard locking system Substituting an actuator for an inappropriate actuator may lead to serious in-

jury and death. You should prevent the interlocking and guard locking system from being manipulated with an inappropriate actuator. Keep the substitute actuator in a safe place and protect it from unau-

thorised access. If substitute actuators are used, these must be installed as described under Installation [

29]

If the original actuators are replaced with substitute actuators, the ori-

ginal actuators must be destroyed before disposal.

} Do not remove the connector's protective cap until you are just about to connect the unit. This will prevent potential contamination. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 9 Overview 3 3.1 Overview Unit features

} Safe guard locking for swing gates and sliding gates

} Safe interlocking (position monitoring)

} Transponder technology

}

} Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD) 2 safety outputs Safety Device Diagnostics can be used to poll sensor information, to perform ac-

tions and to read configuration parameters Manipulation protection in accordance with ISO 14119 (chap. 7.2.d) is possible by verifying the short name of the actuator through the controller via SDD communica-

tion

} Diagnostic input for Y1 for Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD)

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 for Safety Device Diagnostics

} Monitoring of shorts between the safety outputs

} Guard locking element keeps the safety gate from being opened unintentionally

} Auxiliary release for opening the safety gate

}

} Suitable for left and right hinged safety gates

} Pilz type of coding: Fully coded/uniquely coded

} M12, 8-pin male connector

}

1 signal output LEDs:

Supply voltage/fault Status of actuator Status of guard locking Input lights up yellow (without function)

} The bolt in the actuator can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing before the actuator is installed. As a result, the actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally.

} The safety switch PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 can be expanded using a stationary or external escape release (see Order reference: Accessories [

The stationary escape release can be expanded by 25 mm max. two times. The external escape releases are available with push/pull cables between 1.5and4m in length (grading 50cm). 66]). 3.2 Scope of supply

} Scope of supply PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 Safety switch PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 10 Function description 4 4.1 Function description Structure The interlocking and guard locking system prevents the safety gates to the danger zone from being opened while there is any hazard within the danger zone (machine movement, voltage, ...). The safety outputs may have a high or low signal, depending on the position of the actuator and the signal path of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). Gate closed Gate open Safety outputs 12 and 22 Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

} Actuator is detected and

} Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low.

} Diagnostic input Y1 If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is automatically activ-

ated and data is read. If no fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is not used.

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 The status of the actuator is output. If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the signal output/diagnostic output for the writing of data is activated. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 11 Safety switchActuatorSafety switchActuator Function description 4.2 Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation)

}

If there is a low signal at safety inputs S31 and S41, the guard locking pin does not change its position.

} Guard locking may only be deactivated once the hazardous movement has been com-

pleted. Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics

} The safety inputs S31 and S41 have a high signal within max. 500 ms after the receipt of the guard locking activation. Guard locking is activated through a high signal (length 350 - 400 ms ) at inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse (length 350 - 400 ms ) at these inputs deactivates guard locking. 4.2.1 Activation with specification of direction

} The guard locking is activated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S31 before S41).

} The guard locking is deactivated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S41 before S31). Legend tmax Maximum time between the rising edges from S31 and S42 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 12 S31S41tmaxGuard lockingS31S41tmaxGuard locking Function description 4.2.2 4.3 Activation without specification of direction

} The guard locking changes its state when the time between the rising edges from S31 and S41<20ms. Safety Device Diagnostics Safety Device Diagnostics is an option that can be selected independently of the safety-re-

lated wiring. When using the Safety Device Diagnostics, up to 16 sensors can be connected as a sub-

scriber to a fieldbus module. The communication of the sensors with the fieldbus module is automatically built up again with each new supply of the supply voltage. As a result, a sensor can be exchanged, e.g. when servicing, without the need for special measures. An exchange can be detected via the fieldbus module e.g. through the serial number.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module:

Poll information of the sensors (examples: what sensor in the series has switched, at what point could there be an open circuit in the series connection) Read configuration parameters of the sensor (examples: Number of teach-in pro-

cesses remaining, serial number of the switch) Perform actions (example: poll updated actuator name) Selectively activate or deactivate guard locking of individual PSEN ml within a series connection The results of the sensor diagnostics can be checked already during the installation phase via the display in the fieldbus module, without the need to connect the fieldbus module to the network.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module for simple wiring:

Information is passed on via the fieldbus module directly to the network Mappings of the signal outputs to the sensor are automated by the SDD. This prevents wiring errors and an expansion or reduction of the sensors is possible without the need to change existing wiring. Wiring in accordance with IP20: Rapid installation in the control cabined is enabled. Further information on Safety Device Diagnostics can be found in Additional documents that apply [

} Series connection of diagnostics with Safety Device Diagnostics 8]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 13 Function description 4.4 Operating modes The safety switch can be used in various operating modes.

} Operation without safety device diagnostics Standard operating mode After every restart the safety switch is in operation without Safety Device Dia-

gnostics. No communication with Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Safety switch supplies diagnostic data to Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with active use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Activate/deactivate the guard locking by a combination of a Safety Device Dia-

gnostics command and the status of the safety inputs S31 and S41 (S31 and S41 must have a high signal). The safety requirements are guaranteed by the signals S31 and S41 (the fieldbus for Safety Device Diagnostics communication is not safe).

} Operation with specification of direction when activating/deactivating he guard locking A specification of direction can be used to control the change of the guard locking status. Toggling: The safety switch changes with each simultaneous controlling of S31 and S41 the guard locking status (activated <-> deactivated). Force Direction: The safety switch is selectively activated or deactivated by offset activation of the rising edges of S31 and S41. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 14 Y1Y32Y1Y321. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlFieldbus module Function description Timing diagrams Fig.: Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] Gate is closed

[3] Guard locking is activated by the safety control system

[4] Guard locking is activated

[5] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[6] Outputs will be deactivated

[7] Guard locking will be deactivated

[8] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 15

[7]S31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][4][5][8][t1][t1][t2][6][t2]Y1[2][3]SDD command guard lockingGuard lockingActuator Function description Fig.: Passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] Gate is closed

[3] Guard locking is activated

[4] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[5] Outputs will be deactivated

[6] Guard locking will be deactivated

[7] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 16 S31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][4][5][6][8][7][t1][t1][t2][t2]Y1[2][3]Guard lockingActuator Function description 4.5 Block diagram 4.6 Auxiliary release The auxiliary release enables guard locking to be opened from the access side to the danger zone. The safety switch has auxiliary releases on three sides. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 17 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLockPowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1&&Function description INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Operation [

49]) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Legend

[1] Auxiliary release screw Torx T10

[2] Security screw Torx T10, sealed with varnish when delivered Mode of operation:

1. Remove the security screw [2] using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] half a turn anti-clockwise using a Torx T10 screw-

driver. The guard locking pin is displaced and the bolt is released. The safety gate to the danger zone can be opened. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 18

[1][2]Function description 4.6.1 Recommissioning Recommission PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] (see Figure [

Torx T10 screwdriver. 18]) half a turn clockwise using a 2. Re-insert the security screw [2] (see Figure [

3. Seal the security screw with varnish. 4. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 5. Carry out a function test on the safety switch and actuator. The safety function may only 18]) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. be checked by qualified personnel. INFORMATION If the auxiliary release screw is not turned back correctly after use, the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 switches to a fault condition. 4.7 Prevent restart To prevent the machine restarting (unintentionally) while there is someone inside the danger zone, a padlock can be attached via the through hole on the actuator (see diagram). As a result the actuator cannot engage with the safety switch, guard locking is not activated and the machine is prevented from starting. Legend

[1] Through hole on the actuator for attaching a padlock

[2] Padlock

[3] Actuator If the actuator is to blocked using several locks in parallel, a multiple lock can be used (e.g. Brady Lockout device, article no.852439). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 19

[1][2][3]Function description 4.8 Escape release Distinction between escape release and emergency release

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from outside the hazardous area.

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from within the hazardous area and it corresponds to an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed within the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed outside the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. Legend

[1] Escape release stationary

[2] Escape release externally

[3] Tension pressure cables in lengths of 1.50m to 4m

[4] Button of the escape release pin

[5] Escape release pin INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Operation [

49]) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 20

[1][2][3][4][5]Function description Mode of operation If in the hazardous area the button of the escape release pin [4] is pressed towards the safety gate, the escape release impacts directly on the auxiliary release of the safety switch and the auxiliary release unlocks the safety gate. The safety gate can be opened immedi-

ately, enabling the operator to leave the danger zone. There is a low signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 if the escape release was operated. Scope

} Scope of supply stationary escape release 1 escape release stationary 1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk

} Scope of supply external escape release 66]) 1 escape release external with installed push/pull cables (see Order reference:

Accessories [

1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk 4.8.1 Recommissioning 1. Pull back the button of the escape release pin. 2. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 3. Carry out a function test using the escape release. The safety function may only be checked by qualified personnel. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 21 Wiring 5 5.1 5.2 Wiring Important information

} Hand-tighten the connector.

}

Information given in the Technical details [

60] must be followed. Pin assignment, connector and cable 8-pin M12 connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 2)

+24 V UB Safety output channel 1 Safety output channel 2 Signal output/diagnostic output Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 1) 0 V UB Diagnostics input Terminal designation S41 Cable colour (Pilz cable) white A1 12 22 Y32 S31 A2 Y1 Brown Green Yellow grey Pink Blue Red NOTICE The colour marking for the connection lead only applies for the cable that Pilz supplies as an accessory 5.3 EMC requirements

} Ensure the wiring and EMC requirements of EN 60204-1 are met.

} UL requirement: The supply voltage to the safety switch must be protected with a quick-

acting fuse (see Technical details [

60]).

} The inputs and outputs of the safety switch must have a protective separation to voltages over 60 V AC.

} The power supply must meet the regulations for extra low voltages with protective sep-

aration (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN60204-1. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 22 Wiring INFORMATION Only use safety relays with a 24 VDC supply voltage. Safety relays with a wide-range power supply or in AC device versions have internal potential isolation and are not suitable as evaluation devices. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 23 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6 6.1 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Important information Make sure that the selected evaluation device has the following properties:

}

2-channel with feasibility monitoring Both OSSDs must change switch state synchronously. In particular, the evaluation device must monitor that the state of both OSSDs was "Gate unlocked" before both re-

turn to the "Gate locked" state and vice-versa.

} OSSD signals are evaluated through 2 channels

} The state of the OSSDs must be tested before and after safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated (solenoid operation) (see Timing diagram [

15]) WARNING!

Potential loss of safety function due to failure to test for a safe condition Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. Use an evaluation device/safety system to test whether the plant is in a safe condition. Do not operate the solenoid of the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 via S31/S41 unless the plant is in a safe condition.

} The use of Safety Device Diagnostics is described in the System Description "Safety Device Diagnostics". 6.2 Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Use in PL e (Cat. 4) applications

} Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) have 2-channel operation via safe out-

puts, which are suitable for PL e (Cat. 4) applications 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Monitoring of shorts across signal cables through activation of guard locking Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 24 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 3) applications

}

2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) via relay out-

puts 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Exclusion of shorts across signal cables through appropriate measures (e.g. protected cable layout, see EN ISO 13849-2) Legend

[1] Protected cable layout Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 25 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 1Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 124 V[1]Programmable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 2) applications

}

}

}

1-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) 2-channel processing of safety outputs 1-channel operation for interconnected safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), with 1A 6.3 Single connection Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 26 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock RequestProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking24 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1ActuatorSafety switchProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.4 Connection to Pilz evaluation devices The safety switch PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 can be connected to Pilz evaluation devices, for ex-

ample. Suitable Pilz evaluation devices are, for example:

} PNOZmulti for safety gate monitoring Configure the switch in the PNOZmulti Configurator with switch type 3.

} PSS for safety gate monitoring with standard function block SB064, SB066 or FS_SafetyGate

} PSSuniversal PLC for safety gate monitoring with function block FS_SafetyGate The correct connection to the respective evaluation device is described in the operating manual for the evaluation device. Make sure that the connection is made in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual for the selected evaluation device. Connection to PNOZmulti is illustrated by way of example. 6.4.1 Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 27 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSEN ml0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)TxRxActivation of guard locking via SDD ES module Teaching in the actuator 7 7.1 Teaching in the actuator PSEN ml 2.1 Teaching in the actuator for the first time:

The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 60]) is To teach in a new actuator:

} A maximum of 8 learning procedures are possible. 1. The actuator that is to be taught in must be brought into the safety switch's response range as the only transponder. As soon as the actuator is detected, the "Safety Gate"

LED will flash yellow. 2. After 20 s has elapsed, the "Safety Gate" LED turns to quick yellow flashes. Trigger a system reset in the next 120 s by interrupting the power supply. 3. When the supply voltage is switched back on, the learning procedure is complete and the number of permitted additional learning procedures is reduced by 1. NOTICE The actuator must not be removed during the learning procedure. This actuator cannot be retaught on the same safety switch. 7.2 PSEN ml 2.2 The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 60]) is NOTICE No other actuator may be taught in once this actuator has been taught. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 28 Installation 8 8.1 Installation Important information INFORMATION Refer to the guidelines for designing guards and integrating interlocks with guard locking in ENISO14120. NOTICE Install the safety switch and actuator so that the possibilities of defeat are reduced to a minimum (see guidelines for reducing the possibilities for de-

feating interlocking devices in EN ISO 14119). NOTICE Install safety switch and actuator so that it is not possible to reach through with hand or finger.

} The safety switch and actuator should be installed opposite each other in parallel.

} Make sure that the actuator makes complete contact with the mounting surface.

} Make sure that the at least one of the auxiliary release/escape releases can be oper-

ated after installation.

} For a minimum screw depth of 6 mm, M5 screws with resistance class 8.8 should be used to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

60].

} Use non-removable flat head locking screws to attach the safety switch and actuator

(e.g. cheese-head or pan head screws) or rivets.

} Use the same type of screw to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Prevent self-loosening of the fastening elements on the safety switch and actuator, On the safety switch: through torque (see Technical details [

On the actuator: through torque (see Technical details [

60]) 60]) and bonded screw retention

} Make sure that the actuator does not present a risk.

} The mounting surfaces for safety switches and actuators can have a max. unevenness of 0.5 mm.

} Prevent the safety switch and actuator being exposed to heavy shock or vibration.

} The fastening of safety switch and actuator has to be sufficiently stable to ensure the proper operation of the safety switch and the actuator. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 29 Installation 8.2 Tapped hole

} To fix the safety switch at the three possible mounting positions, there are 3 drill holes on 3 sides. As a result, the safety switch can be installed on the frames of left and right hinged slid-

ing gates and swing gates. If necessary use a Mounting plate [

bracket [

Different holding forces arise, based on the installation. Fixing screws in parallel to actuator [

38] (see Order reference: Accessories [

39] or Mounting 66]). 32]:

Holding forceFZh=7.500 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=15.000 N Fixing screws side-on to actuator [

33]:

Holding forceFZh=5.000 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=10.000 N INFORMATION Please note that the stated holding forces only apply when installed without a mounting bracket. The holding forces when installed with a mounting bracket can be found in the table "Technical details for mounting bracket [

65]". The tapped holes must have a depth of at least 6 mm. Installation of safety switch Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, no mounting plate Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, with mounting plate Tapped hole Tapped holes for four M5 screws on the mounting surface. Tapped holes for two M8 screws on the mounting surface, for attaching the mount-

ing plate. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 30 Installation Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, no mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, with mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Actuator, no mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M5 screws (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 31 3119,2193,54,5 8,5 5,35 1048 Installation Actuator, with mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M6 screws (see Dimensions).

(Diagram: order no. 570 492 as example) 8.3 Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Use four M5 screws to attach the switch to the mounting surface.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

60]. Fig.: Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Legend

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 32 6,5XY[3][3][1][2]Installation 8.4 Install fixing screws side-on to actuator

[1] Front of safety switch

[2] Actuator Use four screws [1] to fix the safety switch to the mount-

ing surface. Fully tighten the four screws

[1] on the safety switch. Torque setting: Please note the information provided un-

der Technical details [

60]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 33

[1][2][1][1][1][1]Installation 8.5 Centre the bolt in the actuator housing The bolt must be centred in the actuator housing in order to maintain the distances on set-

tling gates. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing (see diagram). Bolt centred within the actuator hous-

ing Bolt not centred within the actuator housing 8.6 Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 The actuator can be installed vertically on a gate (see Figure [

ator horizontally, the bolt can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing prior to installation. 1. On the housing skin [3] in the actuator housing, press down the spring plate [1] on both 11]). To install the actu-

sides of the bolt and keep the plate held down. 2. Rotate the bolt in the housing skin by 90 in the required direction ([2]). Legend

[1] Spring plate in the housing skin

[2] Bolt, can be rotated 90

[3] Housing skin Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 34

[1][2][3]Installation 3. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing [

34]. 8.7 Installation on sliding gate Legend

[1] Safety switch, installed on gate frame

[2] Actuator with mounting bracket (available as Accessory [

sliding gate 66]), installed on 1. Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

32] or side-on to actuator [

33] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 35

[1][2]Installation 8.8 Installation on swing gate Fig.: Swing gate with internal and external hinge Legend

[1]

[2]

1. Safety switch on gate frame Actuator, installed on swing gate Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

32] or side-on to actuator [

33] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. The actuator should engage smoothly into the safety switch. Install the safety switch horizontally at a swing gate Please note:

Depending on the installation boundary conditions, a larger gate radius may be required

(see diagram). Please contact Pilz when smaller gate radiuses are required. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 36

[1][2][2]Installation Make sure that a slight shift of the rotation point of the door is maintained when installing the actuator. Legend R The distance of the upper part of the safety switch from the rotation point of the door X Parallel shift of the actuator Tilt angle when installing the actuator

} Tilt the actuator during installation by 10 in the following situations:

50 mm < X < 75 mm and R < 600 mm X < 50 mm and R < 500 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 37 Installation 8.9 Installation with mounting bracket 1. Use two M6 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the gate. The position of the drill holes can be taken from the section entitled Dimensions. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the mounting bracket. Fig.: Actuator, installed on mounting bracket Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 38 Installation 8.10 Installation with mounting plate 1. Attach the mounting plate to the swing gate/sliding gate. 2. Use four M5 screws to fix the safety switch [

32] to the mounting plate. Fig.: Safety switch, installed on mounting plate 8.11 Installing the escape release 8.11.1 Important information WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to the incorrect installation of the escape re-

lease!

If the button of the escape release pin is accessible from the outside, the guard locking device can be released from the outside and the safety gates opened, although the hazardous machine is switched on. Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. The escape release should be installed so that it is only accessible from in-

side the danger zone.

} The button of the escape release pin must be impossible to reach from a position out-

side the protected area.

} Make sure that the escape release cannot be operated unintentionally. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 39 Installation

} Prevent the effect of transverse forces on the escape release.

} Secure the screw joints with a with a threadlocker.

} Ensure that the button of the escape release pin is clearly visible and that is it not covered.

} Make sure that the min. bending radius of the push/pull cable of60mm is maintained when using the external escape release.

} Make sure that the button of the escape release pin does not present a risk.

} The mounting surface has to completely cover the bottom of the escape release hous-

ing. The bottom of the escape release housing must not be accessible after installation. 8.11.2 Installation positions for escape release The stationary escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in three dif-

ferent directions each. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 40

[1][2]Installation The external escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in four different directions each. The push/pull cable can be led out on different sides. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back 8.11.3 Installation stationary escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 41

[1][2]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The button of the escape release pin can be removed for the installation (e.g. when the escape release pin is to be run through a wall). The button of the escape release pin must be secured again with a threadlocker and hand-tightened after escape release in-

stallation is complete

} To bridge larger distances the escape release pin can be extended by a max. of 25mm two times (see Order reference: Accessories [

66]). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 42

[1][2][3]Installation Legend

[1] Button of the escape release pin

[2] Escape release pin 8.11.4 Installation external escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 43

[2][1]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 44

[1][2][3]Installation 4. Screw the housing of the escape release with the screws [1] to a mounting surface with 6 - 6,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The screws of the push/pull cable [2] can be loosened to make installation easier (e.g. when the push/pull cable is to be run through a wall). The screws must be fixed with 6 -

6,5 Nm after the escape release is installed. Legend

[1] Screwing the escape release to the mounting area

[2] Screwing the cable Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 45

[1][1][2]Installation 8.11.5 Uninstalling the escape release If the push/pull cable is to be run through a conduit pipe, the cable has to be uninstalled at the escape release first. Prerequisites

} The conduit pipe must have a diameter of at least 12mm. Procedure:

1. Lift off the cover [1] (e.g. with a screwdriver with a flat blade). Legend

[1] Cover

[2] Nut M10 x 0,75

[3] Fork head

[4] Slot nut 2. Loosen the nut [2]. 3. Pull out the push/pull cable with the slot nut [4] and remove the slot nut and the nut [2]

from the cable. 4. Run the cable through the conduit pipe. 5. Push the nut [2] and the slot nut [4] over the fork head [3] back on the cable. 6. Push the cable with the fork head [3] on the fork in the escape release. The slot nut [4]

must be fitted into the nut again. 7. Tighten the nut [2] with 6 - 6,5 Nm. 8. Put the lid [1] back on. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 46

[1][2][4][3]Adjustment 9 Adjustment Please note:

} Safety switch and actuator must be aligned correctly

} Distances are maintained as stated in the following diagram

} Actuator is centred (see Centre bolt in actuator housing [

} Always test the function with a connected evaluation device.

} When installing an external or stationary escape release, check the function of the es-

34]) cape release with a connected evaluation device. View from above View from the side Perspective view

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Max. lateral offset

+/-3,0 mm

[4] Max. vertical offset

+/-3,0 mm

[5] Max. angular offset around the X axis +/-2,0 deg

[6] Max. angular offset around the Y axis +/-2,5 deg

[7] Max. angular offset around the Z axis +/-7,5 deg

[8] Max. offset in closing direction

+/-2 mm Attach safety switch and actuator Once the safety switch and actuator are correctly aligned, the actuator's screw connection must be tightened. 1. Tighten up one M5 screw. 2. For applications with increased safety requirements (e.g. SIL CL 2 PL d), swap the second M5 screw for an M5 locking screw. 3. Tighten up the M5 screw or M5 locking screw. Please note the max. torque setting stated in the Technical details [

60]. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 47

[7][3][1][2][6][8][4][2][1][5][2][1]Operation 10 Operation NOTICE The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be checked by qualified personnel. Status indicators:

}

}

}

}

"Device" LED illuminates green: The unit is ready for operation

"Safety Gate" LED lights up yellow: Actuator is within the response range

"Lock" LED lights up green: Guard locking active

"Input" LED lights up yellow: The unit is ready for operation Legend:

LED off LED on LED flashes (500 ms on, 500 ms off) LED flashes quickly (50 ms on, 950 ms off) LED flashes very quickly (25 ms on, 475 ms off) 10.1 Normal mode LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status Green Yellow Green Green Yellow Green Yellow PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 is started Green Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking deactivated Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking activated Green Yel-

low Yel-

low Yel-

low Yel-

low Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 48 Operation Warnings LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Display not defin-

itive Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detected, guard locking cannot be activated / deac-

tivated The supply voltage to safety inputs S31 and S41 was switched back on before the auxili-

ary release screw was turned back. Safety switch active despite over or under-

voltage Remedy / meas-

ure Check the actu-

ator's alignment [

to the safety switch. 47]

Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on (see Recommissionin g [

19]). Check the supply voltage. If safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated or de-

activated while an undervoltage warning is present, the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 49 Operation 10.2 Error display LED status Switch status Remedy / measure Device Safety Gate Input Lock Red Yellow Display not definitive Safety switch de-

activated due to under or over-

voltage Yel-

low Check the supply voltage and switch the supply voltage off and then on again. Previous LED display is retained Display not definitive Safety outputs in fault condition Auxiliary release/

escape release activated Display not definitive Error Safety switch does not start Check the wiring and switch the supply voltage off and then on again.

} Auxiliary release: Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on

(see Recommissioning [

19]).

} Escape release: Pull the button of the escape release pin back again and then switch on the voltage supply again (see Re-

commissioning under escape release [

21]). Please contact Pilz. Change the safety switch. Red Red Red Green Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Wrong actuator Use the actuator PSEN ml 2.1. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 50 Checks and maintenance 11 Checks and maintenance Regular inspection of the switch function is required to guarantee the trouble-free, long-

term function. If the interlock and guard locking system is only used rarely (opening and closing the safety gate and activating/deactivating the guard locking device), a manual function test is re-

quired. The correct function of the device should be checked at regular intervals and after each er-

ror. Test intervals in accordance with EN ISO 14119:

}

}

for SIL CL 3/PL e at least 1x per month for SIL CL 2/PL d at least 1x per year The Appendix contains a Check list [

69], which should help you perform the test. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 51 Checks and maintenance Visual inspection:

} Check that the seal on the security screw on the auxiliary release is intact. If the seal is not intact, make sure that the security screw is inserted and use varnish to seal the se-

curity screw.

} Check the safety switch and actuator for damage.

} Make sure that the safety switch and actuator are firmly secured.

} Check the offset of the safety switch and actuator. Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset Max. vertical offset

} Check that the wiring is correct.

} Remove any dirt from the safety switch and actuator. Function test

} The actuator is detected and at the safety outputs 12 and 22 there is a high signal after detection of the actuator.

} The guard locking device can be activated/deactivated when the safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated.

} Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

Actuator is detected and Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Escape release

} Test whether the button of the escape release pin can be detected and reached.

} Check the function of the escape release. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 52 Dimensions 12 Dimensions Safety switch Distance between safety switch mounting surface and actuator mounting surface Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 53 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,52953674069,5 Dimensions Mounting plate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570490 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 54 25512,543,25193,5204,531280(12,5)n8,5M5n8,5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for sliding gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570492 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 55 40301011,7540n6,5n6,563,5101060207,7548M5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for swing gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570493 Fig.: Order no.: 570494 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 56 69,5689,54863,569,515,58,56,54079.5689,569,515,58,56,5404863,5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for sliding gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570495 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 57 581040983011,754015063,5n6,525487,7520M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for swing gate (see Accessories [

66]) Fig.: Order no.: 570496 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 58 19769,517768,56,5123150M5205463,525 Dimensions Fig.: Order no.: 570497 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 59 19779,565415063,5251771236,58,520M5 570402 CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed Transponder Transponder 570404 Technical details 13 Technical details General Approvals Sensor's mode of operation Coding level in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Design in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Classification in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Pilz coding type Transponder Frequency band Max. transmitter output Electrical data Supply voltage Voltage Kind Voltage tolerance Output of external power supply

(DC) Max. switching frequency Magnet. supply voltage Max. solenoid current t <150 ms Max. cable capacitance at the safety outputs High 4 PDDB fully coded 570402 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570402 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A No-load, PNOZ with relay con-

tacts PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS 40 nF 70 nF Max. inrush current impulse Current pulse, A1 Pulse duration, A1 5 A 0,0002 ms Max. unit fuse protection in accord-

ance with UL No-load current Inputs Number Voltage at inputs Current at solenoid input Semiconductor outputs OSSD safety outputs Signal outputs Switching current per output Breaking capacity per output 3 A 40 mA 570402 2 24 V DC 500 mA 570402 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W High 4 PDDB uniquely coded 570404 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570404 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 570404 2 24 V DC 500 mA 570404 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 60 Technical details 570402 No yes 100 A 1 V Semiconductor outputs Potential isolation from system voltage Short circuit-proof Residual current at outputs Voltage drop at OSSDs Conditional rated short circuit cur-

rent Lowest operating current Utilisation category in accordance DC-13 with EN 60947-1 Times 570402 Test pulse duration, safety outputs 450 s Switch-on delay 100 A 1 mA after UB is applied Actuator typ. Actuator max. Delay-on de-energisation Actuator typ. Actuator max. 1,1 s 30 ms 50 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms Risk time in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Supply interruption before de-ener-

20 ms gisation Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. 20 ms Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Re-

quest Processing time activate/deactivate guard locking Environmental data Temperature of metal surface at ambient temperature: 25 C Ambient temperature 40 C 100 ms 570402 350 - 400 ms In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-14 Temperature range Storage temperature 0 - 60 C In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-1/-2 Temperature range

-25 - 70 C Climatic suitability In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-78 Humidity EMC Vibration 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 570404 No yes 100 A 1 V 100 A 1 mA DC-13 570404 450 s 1,1 s 30 ms 50 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 20 ms 350 - 400 ms 100 ms 570404 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 60 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-6 Frequency Amplitude 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 61 Technical details Environmental data Shock stress 570402 In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-27 Number of shocks Acceleration Duration 3 30g 11 ms Airgap creepage Overvoltage category Pollution degree Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Protection type Housing In accordance with UL Mechanical data Length of cable with connector Min. bending radius (fixed perman-

ently) K1 Min. bending radius (moving) K1 Cable diameter K1 Escape release available Mechanical life Holding force FZh III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570402 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,2 mm No 1,000,000 cycles Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator 7.500 N 5.000 N Holding force F1Max in accord-

ance with ISO 14119 Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator Latching force Max. vertical offset Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset around the X axis Max. angular offset around the Y axis Max. angular offset around the Z axis Max. offset in closing direction Max. retract speed of actuator Actuator 1 Min. distance between safety switches Connection type Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 570404 EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570404 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,2 mm No 1,000,000 cycles 7.500 N 5.000 N 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 0 mm M12, 8-pin male connector 0 mm M12, 8-pin male connector 62 Technical details Mechanical data Cable Material 570402 LiYY 8 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 570404 LiYY 8 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 6 - 6,5 Nm Max. torque setting for fixing screws Max. torque setting escape release 1,2 - 1,5 Nm Max. torque setting for mounting plate Max. torque setting for mounting bracket Min. gate radius Dimensions 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 22 - 24 Nm Height Width Depth Actuator dimensions Height Width Depth Weight of safety switch Weight of actuator Weight 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g 6 - 6,5 Nm 1,2 - 1,5 Nm 22 - 24 Nm 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g Where standards are undated, the 2015-11 latest editions shall apply. 13.1 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I The following tables describe the classes and specific values of the product interface and the classes of interfaces compatible with it. The classification is described in the ZVEI posi-

tion paper "Classification of Binary 24 V Interfaces - Functional Safety aspects covered by dynamic testing". Solenoid inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

16 Ohm

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 500 s 1,5 nF Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 63 Technical details Safe 1-pole HL outputs Source Safety switch Source parameters Test impulse duration Rated current Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

-

-

Drain Evaluation device Typ.

-

-

-

C1, C2 Max. 450 s 0,1 A 70 nF 13.2 Safety characteristic data NOTICE You must comply with the safety characteristic data in order to achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine. Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

PL d 1-ch. guard locking 2-ch. guard PL e locking 2-ch. OSSD PL e Cat. 2 Cat. 4 Cat. 4 SIL CL 2 4,22E-09 SIL CL 3 SIL CL 3 4,22E-09 2,38E-09 20 20 20 All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety characteristic data. INFORMATION A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values. NOTICE Be sure that you observe the mechanical life. The safety characteristic data are only valid as long as the values of mechanical life are met. Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 64 Supplementary data 14 14.1 Supplementary data Radio approval 14.2 Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit 570492 CE 570492 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 420 g 570493 CE 570493 3000 N 6000 N 420 g 570494 CE 570494 3000 N 6000 N 445 g 14.3 Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit 570495 CE 570495 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 3000 N Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 6000 N 260 g 570496 CE 570496 3000 N 6000 N 600 g 570497 CE 570497 3000 N 6000 N 630 g Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 65 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML Order reference 15 15.1 Order reference System Product type PSEN ml b 2.1 unit PSEN ml b 2.2 unit PSEN ml b 2.1 switch PSEN ml 2.1 actuator 15.2 Accessories Installation accessories Features Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, fully coded Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, uniquely coded Mechanical safety switch with guard locking, fully coded Actuator, fully coded Connection type M12, 8-pin con-

nector Order no. 570402 M12, 8-pin con-

nector 570404 M12, 8-pin con-

nector 570403 570481 Product type PSEN ml escape re-

lease PSEN ml escape re-

lease extension PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 1.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 4.0m PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door Features Escape release stationary Extension escape release stationary 25 mm Escape release with push/pull cable 1.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 2 m Escape release external with push/pull cable 2.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.0 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 4 m Mounting plate for installing the safety switch, with 4 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head locking screw, M5x40 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x16 Order no. 570 460 570 462 570 470 570 471 570 472 570 473 570 474 570 475 570490 570 492 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 66 Order reference Product type PSEN ml bracket swinging door 70 PSEN ml bracket swinging door 80 PSEN ml door handle sliding door PSEN ml door handle swinging door 70 PSEN ml door handle swinging door 80 PSEN screw set bracket swinging door PSEN screw set bracket sliding door Features Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x16. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a swing gate Order no. 570 493 570 494 570 495 570 496 570 497 570498 Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a sliding gate 570499 Cable Product type PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 3m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 5m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf, 20m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 30m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 0.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1.5m Features 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0.5 m 1 m 1.5 m Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 540 321 540 320 540 319 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight 540 326 540 345 540 346 540 333 540 347 67 Order reference Features 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m Product type PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 2m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 20m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 30m PSEN ml / PSENcs Y junction M12 540 341 540 340 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector 540 342 540 343 540 344 570 489 Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 68 Appendix 16 Appendix The following check list is intended as a guide to provide support during commissioning, re-

commissioning and the prescribed regular testing of the PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2. Note that the check list is not intended to replace the plant-specific safety analysis required for commissioning/recommissioning, nor the resulting inspections and actions. INFORMATION Commissioning, recommissioning and regular inspection may only be car-

ried out by qualified personnel. We recommend that you keep the completed check list and store it with the machine docu-

mentation for reference. Date Action Safety switch Number Actuator Number OK Not OK Notes Signature Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 69 EC declaration of conformity 17 EC declaration of conformity This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-

chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads. Authorised representative: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfildern, Germany Operating Manual PSEN ml b 2.1/2.2 1003895-EN-08 70 Front cover y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

8 1 0 2

, 8 0

-

N E

-

5 9 8 3 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnical support is available from Pilz round the clock. AmericasBrazil+55 11 97569-2804Canada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexico+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsiaChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281South Korea+82 31 450 0680Australia+61 3 95600621EuropeAustria+43 1 7986263-0Belgium, Luxembourg+32 9 3217575France+33 3 88104000Germany+49 711 3409-444Ireland+353 21 4804983Italy, Malta+39 0362 1826711Scandinavia+45 74436332Spain+34 938497433Switzerland+41 62 88979-30The Netherlands+31 347 320477Turkey+90 216 5775552United Kingdom+44 1536 462203You can reach our international hotline on: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PAScong, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, THE SPIRIT OF SAFETY are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using ecological materials and energy-saving technologies. Oces and production facilities are ecologically designed, environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz oers sustainability, plus the security of using energy-ecient products and environmentally-friendly solutions.Pilz GmbH & Co. KG Felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostldern, GermanyTel.: +49 711 3409-0 Fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.com200XXXX-EN-0X0-0-2-3-000, 2017-00 Printed in Germany Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2017

 

 

PSEN ml s 1.1

} PSEN sensor technology Operating Manual-1004670-EN-01 Preface This document is the original document. All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made for the user's internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documenta-

tion will be gratefully received. Source code from third-party manufacturers or open source software has been used for some components. The relevant licence information is available on the Internet on the Pilz homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. SD means Secure Digital Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 Validity of documentation Using the documentation Definition of symbols Safety 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 Intended use Safety regulations Safety assessment Additional documents that apply Use of qualified personnel Warranty and liability Disposal For your safety Overview 3.1 3.2 Unit features Scope of supply Function description 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 Structure Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) Activation with specification of direction Activation without specification of direction Safety Device Diagnostics Operating modes Block diagram Auxiliary release Recommissioning Prevent restart Escape release Recommissioning Wiring 5.1 5.2 5.3 Important information Pin assignment, connector and cable EMC requirements Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 Important information Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Single connection Series connection Connection to Pilz evaluation devices Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 5 5 5 5 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 12 14 14 15 15 19 19 21 21 22 23 24 24 24 25 26 26 26 28 29 32 33 3 Contents Section 7 Section 8 Teaching in the actuator 7.1 PSEN ml 1.1 Installation 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 Important information Tapped hole Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Install fixing screws side-on to actuator Centre the bolt in the actuator housing Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 Installation on sliding gate Installation on swing gate Installation with mounting bracket Installation with mounting plate Installing the escape release Important information Installation positions for escape release Installation stationary escape release Installation external escape release Uninstalling the escape release Section 9 Adjustment Section 10 Operation 10.1 10.2 Normal mode Error display Section 11 Checks and maintenance Section 12 Dimensions Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Technical details 13.1 13.2 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I Safety characteristic data Supplementary data 14.1 14.2 14.3 Radio approval Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit Order reference System 15.1 15.2 Accessories Section 16 Appendix Section 17 EC declaration of conformity Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 34 34 35 35 36 38 38 39 39 41 42 44 44 45 45 46 47 49 52 53 54 54 56 57 58 65 68 69 70 70 70 70 71 71 71 75 76 4 Introduction 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Validity of documentation This documentation is valid for the product PSEN ml s 1.1 from Version 2.0. This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and provides guidelines on how to connect the product. Using the documentation This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-

erence. Definition of symbols Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:

DANGER!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. WARNING!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. CAUTION!

This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. NOTICE This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-

aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-

ance. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 5 Introduction INFORMATION This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-

tures. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 6 Safety 2 2.1 Safety Intended use The safety gate system is used for interlocking and guard locking swing gates and sliding gates. The safety gate system can be operated in two ways:

} Unlocking with condition The safety gate system prevents the safety gate from being unlocked while there is any hazard within the danger zone.

} Unlocking without condition The operator can unlock the safety gate system at any time. After starting the unlock-

ing, the guard locking creates a stop command. The time required to unlock the inter-

locking guard has to be longer than the time required to stop the hazardous machine function. The hazardous machine function may only be executed under the following conditions:

} There is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 and

} There is a low signal at safety outputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/Un-

lock Request 2). Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) may only be operated under the following condition:

} Plant is in a safe condition Make sure that this is the case with an AND operation in the safety system immediately before the output is operated. The safety switch meets the requirements in accordance with:

} EN 60947-5-3 with the actuator PSEN ml 1.1: PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Coding level Low, type 4 The safety switch may only be used with the corresponding actuator PSEN ml 1.1. The safety level PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 is only achieved if

}

} The solenoid has 2-channel operation via safe, tested outputs, suitable for PL e (Cat. the safety outputs use 2-channel processing 4)/SIL CL 3 applications. With 1-channel operation of the safety inputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/

Unlock Request 2) it is only possible to achieve safety level PLd(Cat.2)/SILCL2. Foreseeable misuse

} Safety switches and actuators of the safety gate system PSEN ml s 1.1 must not be used as mechanical limit stops

} Use of the PSEN ml s 1.1 under corrosive environmental conditions (cooling emulsions, surface treatment, gases, ) Please contact Pilz. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 7 Safety 2.2 2.2.1 Safety regulations Safety assessment Before using a device it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the Machinery Directive. Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-

quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-

isational standpoint. 2.2.2 Additional documents that apply 2.2.3 Please read and take note of the following documents. Only for use of the Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD):

} Operating manual for the fieldbus module, for example SDD ES ETH or SDD ES PROFIBUS

} System description "Safety Device Diagnostics"

For the use of passive junctions:

} Operating manual of a passive junction, for example:

PSEN ix2 F4 code PSEN ix2 F8 code PDP67 F 4 code You will need to be conversant with the information in these documents in order to fully un-

derstand this operating manual. Use of qualified personnel The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned by competent persons. A competent person is a qualified and knowledgeable person who, because of their train-

ing, experience and current professional activity, has the specialist knowledge required. To be able to inspect, assess and operate devices, systems and machines, the person has to be informed of the state of the art and the applicable national, European and international laws, directives and standards. It is the companys responsibility only to employ personnel who

} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-

tion,

} Have read and understood the information provided in the section entitled Safety

} Have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the spe-

cific application. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 8 Safety 2.2.4 2.2.5 Warranty and liability All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if

} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended,

} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual,

} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified,

} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB boards, soldering work etc.). Disposal

}

In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-

lated characteristic data.

} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act). 2.3 For your safety WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to substituting an actuator from the interlocking and guard locking system Substituting an actuator for an inappropriate actuator may lead to serious in-

jury and death. You should prevent the interlocking and guard locking system from being manipulated with an inappropriate actuator. Keep the substitute actuator in a safe place and protect it from unau-

thorised access. If substitute actuators are used, these must be installed as described under Installation [

35]

If the original actuators are replaced with substitute actuators, the ori-

ginal actuators must be destroyed before disposal.

} Do not remove the connector's protective cap until you are just about to connect the unit. This will prevent potential contamination. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 9 Overview 3 3.1 Overview Unit features

} Safe guard locking for swing gates and sliding gates

} Safe interlocking (position monitoring)

} Transponder technology

}

}

} Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD) 2 safety inputs for series connection of multiple safety switches 2 safety outputs Safety Device Diagnostics can be used to poll sensor information, to perform ac-

tions and to read configuration parameters Manipulation protection in accordance with ISO 14119 (chap. 7.2.d) is possible by verifying the short name of the actuator through the controller via SDD communica-

tion

} Diagnostic input for Y1 for Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD)

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 for Safety Device Diagnostics

} Monitoring of shorts between the safety outputs

} Guard locking element keeps the safety gate from being opened unintentionally

} Auxiliary release for opening the safety gate

}

} Suitable for left and right hinged safety gates

} Pilz coding type: Coded

} M12, 12-pin male connector

}

1 signal output LEDs:

Supply voltage/fault Status of actuator Status of guard locking Status of safety inputs S11 and S21

} The bolt in the actuator can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing before the actuator is installed. As a result, the actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally.

} The safety switch PSEN ml s 1.1 can be expanded using a stationary or external es-

cape release (see Order reference: Accessories [

The stationary escape release can be expanded by 25 mm max. two times. The external escape releases are available with push/pull cables between 1.5and4m in length (grading 50cm). 71]). 3.2 Scope of supply

} Scope of supply PSEN ml s 1.1 Safety switch PSEN ml s 1.1 Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 10 Function description 4 4.1 Function description Structure The interlocking and guard locking system prevents the safety gates to the danger zone from being opened while there is any hazard within the danger zone (machine movement, voltage, ...). The safety outputs may have a high or low signal, depending on the position of the actuator and the signal path of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). Gate closed Gate open Safety outputs 12 and 22 Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

} Actuator is detected and

} Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) and

} There is a high signal at the inputs S11 and S21 If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Feasibility monitoring for safety inputs S11 and S21

}

If one safety input switches from high to low, while the other safety input remains high, an unequal status is displayed: Input LED flashes yellow If this safety input switches back from low to high, while the other safety input remains high, a feasibility error is displayed and a partial operation lock is triggered: Input LED flashes yellow

}

A switch to a high signal will only lead to normal switch operation if both inputs had a low signal. From this moment on, the switch to high may occur (partial operation lock see Error display [

56]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 11 Safety switchActuatorSafety switchActuator Function description

} Diagnostic input Y1 If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is automatically activ-

ated and data is read. If no fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is not used.

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 The status of the actuator is output. If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the signal output/diagnostic output for the writing of data is activated. 4.2 Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation)

}

If there is a low signal at safety inputs S31 and S41, the guard locking pin does not change its position.

} Guard locking may only be deactivated once the hazardous movement has been com-

pleted. Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics

} The safety inputs S31 and S41 have a high signal within max. 500 ms after the receipt of the guard locking activation. Single connection Guard locking is activated through a high signal (length 350 - 400 ms ) at inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse (length 350 - 400 ms ) at these inputs deactivates guard locking. Series connection In a series connection with n safety switches the safety lock is activated by a high signal with a minimum length of t=n*(350 - 400 ms) at the inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid opera-

tion). Number of safety switches in the series connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Request in ms 350 700 1050 1400 1750 2100 After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse of the specified length at these in-

puts deactivates guard locking. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 12 Function description Legend

[1] PSEN ml Y junction M12

[2] PSEN ml end adapter

} Series connection of the OSSD outputs

} Series connection of diagnostics with Safety Device Diagnostics

} Series connection of the solenoid operation Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 13 3 x PSEN ml sX1X2X3X1X2X3X1X2Safety control system8-core12-core[1][2]S21S111222S21S1112221. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlY1Y32Y1Y321. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlFieldbus module Function description 4.2.1 Activation with specification of direction

} The guard locking is activated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S31 before S41).

} The guard locking is deactivated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S41 before S31). Legend tmax Maximum time between the rising edges from S31 and S42 4.2.2 Activation without specification of direction

} The guard locking changes its state when the time between the rising edges from S31 and S41<20ms. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 14 S31S413242S31S4132421. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlS31S41tmaxGuard lockingS31S41tmaxGuard locking Function description 4.3 Safety Device Diagnostics Safety Device Diagnostics is an option that can be selected independently of the safety-re-

lated wiring. When using the Safety Device Diagnostics, up to 16 sensors connected in series can be connected as a subscriber to a fieldbus module. The communication of the sensors with the fieldbus module is automatically built up again with each new supply of the supply voltage. As a result, a sensor can be exchanged, e.g. when servicing, without the need for special measures. An exchange can be detected via the fieldbus module e.g. through the serial number.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module:

Poll information of the sensors (examples: what sensor in the series has switched, at what point could there be an open circuit in the series connection) Read configuration parameters of the sensor (examples: Number of teach-in pro-

cesses remaining, serial number of the switch) Perform actions (example: poll updated actuator name) Selectively activate or deactivate guard locking of individual PSEN ml within a series connection The results of the sensor diagnostics can be checked already during the installation phase via the display in the fieldbus module, without the need to connect the fieldbus module to the network.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module for simple wiring:

Information is passed on via the fieldbus module directly to the network Mappings of the signal outputs to the sensor are automated by the SDD. This prevents wiring errors and an expansion or reduction of the sensors is possible without the need to change existing wiring. Wiring in accordance with IP20: Rapid installation in the control cabined is enabled. Wiring in accordance with IP67: Various passive junctions can be used (see Order references for accessories [

cable from the field in the control cabinet. 71]) to connect several sensors with only one Further information on Safety Device Diagnostics can be found in Additional documents that apply [

8]. 4.4 Operating modes The safety switch can be used in various operating modes.

} Operation without safety device diagnostics Standard operating mode After every restart the safety switch is in operation without Safety Device Dia-

gnostics. No communication with Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 15 Function description Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Safety switch supplies diagnostic data to Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with active use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Activate/deactivate the guard locking by a combination of a Safety Device Dia-

gnostics command and the status of the safety inputs S31 and S41 (S31 and S41 must have a high signal). The safety requirements are guaranteed by the signals S31 and S41 (the fieldbus for Safety Device Diagnostics communication is not safe).

} Operation with specification of direction when activating/deactivating he guard locking A specification of direction can be used to control the change of the guard locking status. Toggling: The safety switch changes with each simultaneous controlling of S31 and S41 the guard locking status (activated <-> deactivated). Force Direction: The safety switch is selectively activated or deactivated by offset activation of the rising edges of S31 and S41. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 16 Function description Timing diagrams Fig.: Passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] The door connected upstream in the series connection is closed

[3] The door connected upstream in the series connection is locked

[4] Gate is closed

[5] Guard locking is activated by the programmable safety system

[6] Guard locking is activated

[7] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[8] Outputs will be deactivated

[9] Guard locking will be deactivated

[10] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 17

[1][4][5][8][9][7][t1][t1][t2][t2][2][3]32 + 42[10]Guard lockingActuator Function description Fig.: Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] The door connected upstream in the series connection is closed

[3] The door connected upstream in the series connection is locked

[4] Gate is closed

[5] Guard locking is activated by the programmable safety system

[6] Guard locking is activated

[7] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[8] Outputs will be deactivated

[9] Guard locking will be deactivated

[10] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 18

[7][1][4][5][8][9][t1][t1][t2][t2][2][3]32 + 42[10]SDD command guard lockingGuard lockingActuator Function description 4.5 Block diagram 4.6 Auxiliary release The auxiliary release enables guard locking to be opened from the access side to the danger zone. The safety switch has auxiliary releases on three sides. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 19 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLockPowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1S11S213242&&&&Function description INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Op-

eration) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Legend

[1] Auxiliary release screw Torx T10

[2] Security screw Torx T10, sealed with varnish when delivered Mode of operation:

1. Remove the security screw [2] using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] half a turn anti-clockwise using a Torx T10 screw-

driver. The guard locking pin is displaced and the bolt is released. The safety gate to the danger zone can be opened. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 20

[1][2]Function description 4.6.1 Recommissioning Recommission PSEN ml s 1.1 1. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] (see Figure [

Torx T10 screwdriver. 20]) half a turn clockwise using a 2. Re-insert the security screw [2] (see Figure [

3. Seal the security screw with varnish. 4. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 5. Carry out a function test on the safety switch and actuator. The safety function may only 20]) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. be checked by qualified personnel. INFORMATION If the auxiliary release screw is not turned back correctly after use, the PSEN ml s 1.1 switches to a fault condition. 4.7 Prevent restart To prevent the machine restarting (unintentionally) while there is someone inside the danger zone, a padlock can be attached via the through hole on the actuator (see diagram). As a result the actuator cannot engage with the safety switch, guard locking is not activated and the machine is prevented from starting. Legend

[1] Through hole on the actuator for attaching a padlock

[2] Padlock

[3] Actuator If the actuator is to blocked using several locks in parallel, a multiple lock can be used (e.g. Brady Lockout device, article no.852439). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 21

[1][2][3]Function description 4.8 Escape release Distinction between escape release and emergency release

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from outside the hazardous area.

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from within the hazardous area and it corresponds to an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed within the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed outside the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. Legend

[1] Escape release stationary

[2] Escape release externally

[3] Tension pressure cables in lengths of 1.50m to 4m

[4] Button of the escape release pin

[5] Escape release pin INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Op-

eration) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 22

[1][2][3][4][5]Function description Mode of operation If in the hazardous area the button of the escape release pin [4] is pressed towards the safety gate, the escape release impacts directly on the auxiliary release of the safety switch and the auxiliary release unlocks the safety gate. The safety gate can be opened immedi-

ately, enabling the operator to leave the danger zone. There is a low signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 if the escape release was operated. Scope

} Scope of supply stationary escape release 1 escape release stationary 1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk

} Scope of supply external escape release 71]) 1 escape release external with installed push/pull cables (see Order reference:

Accessories [

1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk 4.8.1 Recommissioning 1. Pull back the button of the escape release pin. 2. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 3. Carry out a function test using the escape release. The safety function may only be checked by qualified personnel. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 23 Wiring 5 5.1 5.2 Wiring Important information

} Hand-tighten the connector.

}

Information given in the Technical details [

65] must be followed. Pin assignment, connector and cable 12-pin M12 male connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Function

+24 V UB 0 V UB Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 2) Safety output channel 1 Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 1) Safety output channel 2 Safety input channel 1 Signal output/diagnostic output Diagnostics input Safety input channel 2 Operation of solenoid of the next safety switch in the series connection (channel 1) Operation of solenoid of the next safety switch in the series connection (channel 2) Terminal designation A1 A2 S41 Cable colour (Pilz cable) Brown Blue White 12 S31 22 S11 Y32 Y1 S21 32 42 Green Pink Yellow Black Grey Red Purple Grey-pink Red-blue Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 24 Wiring 5.3 NOTICE The colour marking for the connection lead only applies for the cable that Pilz supplies as an accessory EMC requirements

} Ensure the wiring and EMC requirements of EN 60204-1 are met.

} UL requirement: The supply voltage to the safety switch must be protected with a quick-

acting fuse (see Technical details [

65]).

} The inputs and outputs of the safety switch must have a protective separation to voltages over 60 V AC.

} The power supply must meet the regulations for extra low voltages with protective sep-

aration (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN60204-1. INFORMATION Only use safety relays with a 24 VDC supply voltage. Safety relays with a wide-range power supply or in AC device versions have internal potential isolation and are not suitable as evaluation devices. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 25 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6 6.1 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Important information Make sure that the selected evaluation device has the following properties:

}

2-channel with feasibility monitoring Both OSSDs must change switch state synchronously. In particular, the evaluation device must monitor that the state of both OSSDs was "Gate unlocked" before both re-

turn to the "Gate locked" state and vice-versa.

} OSSD signals are evaluated through 2 channels

} The state of the OSSDs must be tested before and after safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated (solenoid operation) (see Timing diagram [

17]) WARNING!

Potential loss of safety function due to failure to test for a safe condition Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. Use an evaluation device/safety system to test whether the plant is in a safe condition. Do not operate the solenoid of the PSEN ml s 1.1 via S31/S41 unless the plant is in a safe condition.

} The use of Safety Device Diagnostics is described in the System Description "Safety Device Diagnostics". 6.2 Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Use in PL e (Cat. 4) applications

} Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) have 2-channel operation via safe out-

puts, which are suitable for PL e (Cat. 4) applications 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Monitoring of shorts across signal cables through activation of guard locking Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 26 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 3) applications

}

2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) via relay out-

puts 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Exclusion of shorts across signal cables through appropriate measures (e.g. protected cable layout, see EN ISO 13849-2) Legend

[1] Protected cable layout Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 27 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 1S11S21Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuator22Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensorLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 124 V[1]A1A224 V0 VS11S21Programmable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 2) applications

}

}

}

1-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) 2-channel processing of safety outputs 1-channel operation for interconnected safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), with 1A 6.3 Single connection Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 28 Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuator22Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensorLock/Unlock RequestA1A224 V0 VS11S2124 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1S11S21ActuatorSafety switchProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.4 Series connection CAUTION!

Extension of delay-on de-energisation When several (n) devices are connected in series, the delay-on de-ener-

gisation time adds with the number of interconnected safety switches. The max. delay-on de-energisation is made up of the risk time (see Technical details [

+ (n-1) x max. delay-on de-energisation of the inputs

+ max. delay-on de-energisation of the evaluation device 65]) The safety switches PSEN ml s 1.1 are suitable for series connection with max. 16 safety switches. In practice, the maximum possible number will be limited by the following parameters, among others:

} The required SIL level (e.g. SIL CL 3),

}

}

} Cable length (see notes on cable lengths),

} Height of supply voltage. Ensure there is sufficient supply voltage, taking inrush currents and fusing into considera-

tion. the required performance level (e.g. PL e (Cat. 4)), the maximum delay or risk time permitted by the application, Notes on cable lengths

} Determine the values under the following conditions:

Room temperature (25C), conductor cross section 0.25mm2, output load per output

(12,22,Y32) each 10mA Legend

[1] Safety control system

[2] Safety switch PSEN ml Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 29

[1]L1[2][2][2]L2L3L4L5L6[2][2][2]Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Examples for cable lengths

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 20.4 V L4 L3 L2 Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 24 V L1 50 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 10 m 5 m 20 m 10 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 10 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m L4 L3 L2 Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 28.8 V L1 120 m 60 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 20 m 60 m 50 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m L5 L6 5 m 5 m 5 m L5 L6 10 m 20 m 20 m Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 L2 L1 180 m 130 m 50 m 80 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m L3 L4 L5 L6 50 m 50 m 30 m 20 m 30 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m Overall length 50 m 50 m 40 m 35 m 30 m 30 m Overall length 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m Overall length 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 30 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices For connecting the safety switch PSEN ml s 1.1 in a series connection there are the follow-

ing options:

} Wiring with the safety control system via PSEN ml Y junction Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 31 24 V0 VA1A21222S21S11FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32423212221222A1A2A1A2RxTxS21S11I2I1S21S113242S31S414232S31S41O2O1Y1Y32Y1Y32Y1ActuatorSafety switchFieldbus moduleSafety control systemSafety switchSafety switchActuatorActuator Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.5 Legend

[1] PSEN ml Y junction M12

[2] PSEN ml end adapter

} When establishing the series connections with connection to the safety control system, use the following adapters:

PSEN ml Y junction M12 PSEN ml end adapter

} Connection in the control cabinet at the terminal block Connect the 12-core cables of the safety switch to the terminal block of the control cabinet. Connection to Pilz evaluation devices The safety switch PSEN ml s 1.1 can be connected to Pilz evaluation devices, for example. Suitable Pilz evaluation devices are, for example:

} PNOZmulti for safety gate monitoring Configure the switch in the PNOZmulti Configurator with switch type 3.

} PSS for safety gate monitoring with standard function block SB064, SB066 or FS_SafetyGate

} PSSuniversal PLC for safety gate monitoring with function block FS_SafetyGate The correct connection to the respective evaluation device is described in the operating manual for the evaluation device. Make sure that the connection is made in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual for the selected evaluation device. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 32 3 x PSEN ml sX1X2X3X1X2X3X1X2Safety control system8-core12-core[1][2]Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Connection to PNOZmulti is illustrated by way of example. 6.5.1 Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 33 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSEN ml0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)Rx16S11S21Tx32421112Activation of guard locking via SDD ES modulefollowing PSEN ml Teaching in the actuator 7 7.1 Teaching in the actuator PSEN ml 1.1 Any corresponding Pilz actuator (see Technical Details [

is brought into the response range. 65]) is detected as soon as it Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 34 Installation 8 8.1 Installation Important information INFORMATION Refer to the guidelines for designing guards and integrating interlocks with guard locking in ENISO14120. NOTICE Install the safety switch and actuator so that the possibilities of defeat are reduced to a minimum (see guidelines for reducing the possibilities for de-

feating interlocking devices in EN ISO 14119). NOTICE Install safety switch and actuator so that it is not possible to reach through with hand or finger.

} The safety switch and actuator should be installed opposite each other in parallel.

} Make sure that the actuator makes complete contact with the mounting surface.

} Make sure that the at least one of the auxiliary release/escape releases can be oper-

ated after installation.

} For a minimum screw depth of 6 mm, M5 screws with resistance class 8.8 should be used to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

65].

} Use non-removable flat head locking screws to attach the safety switch and actuator

(e.g. cheese-head or pan head screws) or rivets.

} Use the same type of screw to attach the safety switch and actuator.

}

} Prevent self-loosening of the fastening elements on the safety switch and actuator, Installation of the safety switch and actuator must be concealed. On the safety switch: through torque (see Technical details [

On the actuator: through torque (see Technical details [

65]) 65]) and bonded screw retention

} Make sure that the actuator does not present a risk.

} The mounting surfaces for safety switches and actuators can have a max. unevenness of 0.5 mm.

} Prevent the safety switch and actuator being exposed to heavy shock or vibration.

} The fastening of safety switch and actuator has to be sufficiently stable to ensure the proper operation of the safety switch and the actuator. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 35 Installation 8.2 Tapped hole

} To fix the safety switch at the three possible mounting positions, there are 3 drill holes on 3 sides. As a result, the safety switch can be installed on the frames of left and right hinged slid-

ing gates and swing gates. If necessary use a Mounting plate [

bracket [

Different holding forces arise, based on the installation. Fixing screws in parallel to actuator [

44] (see Order reference: Accessories [

44] or Mounting 71]). 38]:

Holding forceFZh=7.500 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=15.000 N Fixing screws side-on to actuator [

38]:

Holding forceFZh=5.000 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=10.000 N INFORMATION Please note that the stated holding forces only apply when installed without a mounting bracket. The holding forces when installed with a mounting bracket can be found in the table "Technical details for mounting bracket [

70]". The tapped holes must have a depth of at least 6 mm. Installation of safety switch Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, no mounting plate Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, with mounting plate Tapped hole Tapped holes for four M5 screws on the mounting surface. Tapped holes for two M8 screws on the mounting surface, for attaching the mount-

ing plate. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 36 Installation Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, no mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, with mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Actuator, no mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M5 screws (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 37 3119,2193,54,5 8,5 5,35 1048 Installation Actuator, with mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M6 screws (see Dimensions).

(Diagram: order no. 570 492 as example) 8.3 Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Use four M5 screws to attach the switch to the mounting surface.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

65]. Fig.: Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Legend

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator 8.4 Install fixing screws side-on to actuator

[1] Front of safety switch

[2] Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 38 6,5XY[3][3][1][2][1][2]Installation Use four screws [1] to fix the safety switch to the mount-

ing surface. Fully tighten the four screws

[1] on the safety switch. Torque setting: Please note the information provided un-

der Technical details [

65]. 8.5 Centre the bolt in the actuator housing The bolt must be centred in the actuator housing in order to maintain the distances on set-

tling gates. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing (see diagram). Bolt centred within the actuator hous-

ing Bolt not centred within the actuator housing 8.6 Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 The actuator can be installed vertically on a gate (see Figure [

ator horizontally, the bolt can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing prior to installation. 1. On the housing skin [3] in the actuator housing, press down the spring plate [1] on both 11]). To install the actu-

sides of the bolt and keep the plate held down. 2. Rotate the bolt in the housing skin by 90 in the required direction ([2]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 39

[1][1][1][1]Installation Legend

[1] Spring plate in the housing skin

[2] Bolt, can be rotated 90

[3] Housing skin 3. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing [

39]. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 40

[1][2][3]Installation 8.7 Installation on sliding gate Legend

[1] Safety switch, installed on gate frame

[2] Actuator with mounting bracket (available as Accessory [

sliding gate 71]), installed on 1. Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

38] or side-on to actuator [

38] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 41

[1][2]Installation 8.8 Installation on swing gate Fig.: Swing gate with internal and external hinge Legend

[1]

[2]

1. Safety switch on gate frame Actuator, installed on swing gate Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

38] or side-on to actuator [

38] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. The actuator should engage smoothly into the safety switch. Install the safety switch horizontally at a swing gate Please note:

Depending on the installation boundary conditions, a larger gate radius may be required

(see diagram). Please contact Pilz when smaller gate radiuses are required. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 42

[1][2][2]Installation Make sure that a slight shift of the rotation point of the door is maintained when installing the actuator. Legend R The distance of the upper part of the safety switch from the rotation point of the door X Parallel shift of the actuator Tilt angle when installing the actuator

} Tilt the actuator during installation by 10 in the following situations:

50 mm < X < 75 mm and R < 600 mm X < 50 mm and R < 500 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 43 Installation 8.9 Installation with mounting bracket 1. Use two M6 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the gate. The position of the drill holes can be taken from the section entitled Dimensions. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the mounting bracket. Fig.: Actuator, installed on mounting bracket 8.10 Installation with mounting plate 1. Attach the mounting plate to the swing gate/sliding gate. 2. Use four M5 screws to fix the safety switch [

38] to the mounting plate. Fig.: Safety switch, installed on mounting plate Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 44 Installation 8.11 Installing the escape release 8.11.1 Important information WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to the incorrect installation of the escape re-

lease!

If the button of the escape release pin is accessible from the outside, the guard locking device can be released from the outside and the safety gates opened, although the hazardous machine is switched on. Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. The escape release should be installed so that it is only accessible from in-

side the danger zone.

} The button of the escape release pin must be impossible to reach from a position out-

side the protected area.

} Make sure that the escape release cannot be operated unintentionally.

} Prevent the effect of transverse forces on the escape release.

} Secure the screw joints with a with a threadlocker.

} Ensure that the button of the escape release pin is clearly visible and that is it not covered.

} Make sure that the min. bending radius of the push/pull cable of60mm is maintained when using the external escape release.

} Make sure that the button of the escape release pin does not present a risk.

} The mounting surface has to completely cover the bottom of the escape release hous-

ing. The bottom of the escape release housing must not be accessible after installation. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 45 Installation 8.11.2 Installation positions for escape release The stationary escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in three dif-

ferent directions each. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 46

[1][2]Installation The external escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in four different directions each. The push/pull cable can be led out on different sides. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back 8.11.3 Installation stationary escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 47

[1][2]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The button of the escape release pin can be removed for the installation (e.g. when the escape release pin is to be run through a wall). The button of the escape release pin must be secured again with a threadlocker and hand-tightened after escape release in-

stallation is complete

} To bridge larger distances the escape release pin can be extended by a max. of 25mm two times (see Order reference: Accessories [

71]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 48

[1][2][3]Installation Legend

[1] Button of the escape release pin

[2] Escape release pin 8.11.4 Installation external escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 49

[2][1]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 50

[1][2][3]Installation 4. Screw the housing of the escape release with the screws [1] to a mounting surface with 6 - 6,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The screws of the push/pull cable [2] can be loosened to make installation easier (e.g. when the push/pull cable is to be run through a wall). The screws must be fixed with 6 -

6,5 Nm after the escape release is installed. Legend

[1] Screwing the escape release to the mounting area

[2] Screwing the cable Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 51

[1][1][2]Installation 8.11.5 Uninstalling the escape release If the push/pull cable is to be run through a conduit pipe, the cable has to be uninstalled at the escape release first. Prerequisites

} The conduit pipe must have a diameter of at least 12mm. Procedure:

1. Lift off the cover [1] (e.g. with a screwdriver with a flat blade). Legend

[1] Cover

[2] Nut M10 x 0,75

[3] Fork head

[4] Slot nut 2. Loosen the nut [2]. 3. Pull out the push/pull cable with the slot nut [4] and remove the slot nut and the nut [2]

from the cable. 4. Run the cable through the conduit pipe. 5. Push the nut [2] and the slot nut [4] over the fork head [3] back on the cable. 6. Push the cable with the fork head [3] on the fork in the escape release. The slot nut [4]

must be fitted into the nut again. 7. Tighten the nut [2] with 6 - 6,5 Nm. 8. Put the lid [1] back on. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 52

[1][2][4][3]Adjustment 9 Adjustment Please note:

} Safety switch and actuator must be aligned correctly

} Distances are maintained as stated in the following diagram

} Actuator is centred (see Centre bolt in actuator housing [

} Always test the function with a connected evaluation device.

} When installing an external or stationary escape release, check the function of the es-

39]) cape release with a connected evaluation device. View from above View from the side Perspective view

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Max. lateral offset

+/-3,0 mm

[4] Max. vertical offset

+/-3,0 mm

[5] Max. angular offset around the X axis +/-2,0 deg

[6] Max. angular offset around the Y axis +/-2,5 deg

[7] Max. angular offset around the Z axis +/-7,5 deg

[8] Max. offset in closing direction

+/-2 mm Attach safety switch and actuator Once the safety switch and actuator are correctly aligned, the actuator's screw connection must be tightened. 1. Tighten up one M5 screw. 2. For applications with increased safety requirements (e.g. SIL CL 2 PL d), swap the second M5 screw for an M5 locking screw. 3. Tighten up the M5 screw or M5 locking screw. Please note the max. torque setting stated in the Technical details [

65]. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 53

[7][3][1][2][6][8][4][2][1][5][2][1]Operation 10 Operation NOTICE The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be checked by qualified personnel. Status indicators:

}

}

}

}

"Device" LED illuminates green: The unit is ready for operation

"Safety Gate" LED lights up yellow: Actuator is within the response range

"Lock" LED lights up green: Guard locking active

"Input" LED lights independently of the status of safety inputs S11 and S21 Legend:

LED off LED on LED flashes (500 ms on, 500 ms off) LED flashes quickly (50 ms on, 950 ms off) LED flashes very quickly (25 ms on, 475 ms off) 10.1 Normal mode LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Green Green Green Yellow Yel-

low Yel-

low Switch status PSEN ml s 1.1 is started Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are low Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are high Safety gate closed, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are high Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 54 Operation LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking activated Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Warnings LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Display not defin-

itive Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detected, guard locking cannot be activated / deac-

tivated The supply voltage to safety inputs S31 and S41 was switched back on before the auxili-

ary release screw was turned back. Safety switch active despite over or under-

voltage Green Red Display not defin-

itive Display not defin-

itive Yel-

low Yel-

low Display not definitive Green Partial operation:

One input is low, after both inputs were high Partial operation lock:

One input is low, after both inputs were high Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 Remedy / meas-

ure Check the actu-

ator's alignment [

to the safety switch. 53]

Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on (see Recommissionin g [

21]). Check the supply voltage. If safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated or de-

activated while an undervoltage warning is present, the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Open both inputs

(switch to normal operation). Open both in-

puts. This will cancel the lock. 55 Operation LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Display not defin-

itive Red Green Yel-

low Switch status Partial operation lock:

Both inputs are high Remedy / meas-

ure 10.2 Error display LED status Switch status Remedy / measure Device Safety Gate Input Lock Red Yellow Display not definitive Safety switch de-

activated due to under or over-

voltage Yel-

low Check the supply voltage and switch the supply voltage off and then on again. Previous LED display is retained Display not definitive Safety outputs in fault condition Auxiliary release/

escape release activated Display not definitive Error Safety switch does not start Check the wiring and switch the supply voltage off and then on again.

} Auxiliary release: Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on

(see Recommissioning [

21]).

} Escape release: Pull the button of the escape release pin back again and then switch on the voltage supply again (see Re-

commissioning under escape release [

23]). Please contact Pilz. Change the safety switch. Red Red Red Green Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Wrong actuator Use the actuator PSEN ml 1.1. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 56 Checks and maintenance 11 Checks and maintenance Regular inspection of the switch function is required to guarantee the trouble-free, long-

term function. If the interlock and guard locking system is only used rarely (opening and closing the safety gate and activating/deactivating the guard locking device), a manual function test is re-

quired. The correct function of the device should be checked at regular intervals and after each er-

ror. Test intervals in accordance with EN ISO 14119:

}

}

for SIL CL 3/PL e at least 1x per month for SIL CL 2/PL d at least 1x per year The Appendix contains a Check list [

75], which should help you perform the test. Visual inspection:

} Check that the seal on the security screw on the auxiliary release is intact. If the seal is not intact, make sure that the security screw is inserted and use varnish to seal the se-

curity screw.

} Check the safety switch and actuator for damage.

} Make sure that the safety switch and actuator are firmly secured.

} Check the offset of the safety switch and actuator. Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset Max. vertical offset

} Check that the wiring is correct.

} Remove any dirt from the safety switch and actuator. Function test

} The actuator is detected and at the safety outputs 12 and 22 there is a high signal after detection of the actuator.

} The guard locking device can be activated/deactivated when the safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated.

} Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

Actuator is detected and Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) and There is a high signal at the inputs S11 and S21 If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Escape release

} Test whether the button of the escape release pin can be detected and reached.

} Check the function of the escape release. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 57 Dimensions 12 Dimensions Safety switch Distance between safety switch mounting surface and actuator mounting surface Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 58 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,52953674069,5 Dimensions Mounting plate (see Accessories [

71]) Fig.: Order no.: 570490 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 59 25512,543,25193,5204,531280(12,5)n8,5M5n8,5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for sliding gate (see Accessories [

71]) Fig.: Order no.: 570492 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 60 40301011,7540n6,5n6,563,5101060207,7548M5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for swing gate (see Accessories [

71]) Fig.: Order no.: 570493 Fig.: Order no.: 570494 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 61 69,5689,54863,569,515,58,56,54079.5689,569,515,58,56,5404863,5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for sliding gate (see Accessories [

71]) Fig.: Order no.: 570495 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 62 581040983011,754015063,5n6,525487,7520M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for swing gate (see Accessories [

71]) Fig.: Order no.: 570496 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 63 19769,517768,56,5123150M5205463,525 Dimensions Fig.: Order no.: 570497 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 64 19779,565415063,5251771236,58,520M5 Technical details 13 Technical details General Approvals Sensor's mode of operation Coding level in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Design in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Classification in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Pilz coding type Transponder Frequency band Max. transmitter output Electrical data Supply voltage Voltage Kind Voltage tolerance Output of external power supply (DC) Max. switching frequency Magnet. supply voltage Max. solenoid current t <150 ms Max. cable capacitance at the safety outputs No-load, PNOZ with relay contacts PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS Max. inrush current impulse Current pulse, A1 Pulse duration, A1 Max. unit fuse protection in accordance with UL No-load current Inputs Number Voltage at inputs Current at solenoid input Input current range Semiconductor outputs OSSD safety outputs Signal outputs Switching current per output Breaking capacity per output Potential isolation from system voltage Short circuit-proof Residual current at outputs Voltage drop at OSSDs Conditional rated short circuit current CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed Transponder Low 4 PDDB Coded 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 4 24 V DC 500 mA 1,6 - 3 mA 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W No yes 100 A 1 V 100 A Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 65 Technical details Semiconductor outputs Lowest operating current Utilisation category in accordance with EN 60947-1 Times Test pulse duration, safety outputs Switch-on delay after UB is applied Inputs typ. Inputs max. Actuator typ. Actuator max. Delay-on de-energisation Inputs typ. Inputs max. Actuator typ. Actuator max. Risk time in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Supply interruption before de-energisation Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Request Processing time activate/deactivate guard locking Environmental data Temperature of metal surface at ambient temperat-

ure: 25 C Ambient temperature In accordance with the standard Temperature range Storage temperature In accordance with the standard Temperature range Climatic suitability In accordance with the standard Humidity EMC Vibration In accordance with the standard Frequency Amplitude Shock stress In accordance with the standard Number of shocks Acceleration Duration Airgap creepage Overvoltage category Pollution degree Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 1 mA DC-13 450 s 1,1 s 1 ms 3 ms 30 ms 50 ms 3 ms 5 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 20 ms 350 - 400 ms 100 ms 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 60 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 66 Technical details Environmental data Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Protection type Housing In accordance with UL Mechanical data Length of cable with connector Min. bending radius (fixed permanently) K1 Min. bending radius (moving) K1 Cable diameter K1 Escape release available Mechanical life Holding force FZh Fixing screws in parallel to actuator Fixing screws side-on to actuator Holding force F1Max in accordance with ISO 14119 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,5 mm No 1,000,000 cycles 7.500 N 5.000 N Fixing screws in parallel to actuator Fixing screws side-on to actuator Latching force Max. vertical offset Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset around the X axis Max. angular offset around the Y axis Max. angular offset around the Z axis Max. offset in closing direction Max. retract speed of actuator Actuator 1 Min. distance between safety switches Connection type Cable Material Max. torque setting for fixing screws Max. torque setting escape release Max. torque setting for mounting plate Max. torque setting for mounting bracket Min. gate radius Dimensions Height Width Depth Actuator dimensions Height Width Depth Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 1.1 0 mm M12, 12-pin male connector LiYY 12 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 6 - 6,5 Nm 1,2 - 1,5 Nm 22 - 24 Nm 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 67 Technical details Mechanical data Weight of safety switch Weight of actuator Weight 950 g 145 g 1.100 g Where standards are undated, the 2015-11 latest editions shall apply. 13.1 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I The following tables describe the classes and specific values of the product interface and the classes of interfaces compatible with it. The classification is described in the ZVEI posi-

tion paper "Classification of Binary 24 V Interfaces - Functional Safety aspects covered by dynamic testing". Inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Test impulse interval Solenoid inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Safe 1-pole HL outputs C2 Min.

-

9 kOhm

-

1 ms C2 Min.

-

16 Ohm

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

-

Max. 500 s

-

1 nF

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 500 s 1,5 nF C1, C2 Source Safety switch Drain Evaluation device C2 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 68 Technical details Source parameters Test impulse duration Rated current Capacitive load Min.

-

-

-

Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 450 s 0,1 A 70 nF 13.2 Safety characteristic data NOTICE You must comply with the safety characteristic data in order to achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine. Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

PL d 1-ch. guard locking 2-ch. guard PL e locking 2-ch. OSSD PL e Cat. 2 Cat. 4 Cat. 4 SIL CL 2 2,54E-08 SIL CL 3 SIL CL 3 2,54E-08 1,90E-08 20 20 20 All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety characteristic data. INFORMATION A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values. NOTICE Be sure that you observe the mechanical life. The safety characteristic data are only valid as long as the values of mechanical life are met. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 69 Supplementary data 14 14.1 Supplementary data Radio approval 14.2 Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit 570492 CE 570492 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 420 g 570493 CE 570493 3000 N 6000 N 420 g 570494 CE 570494 3000 N 6000 N 445 g 14.3 Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit 570495 CE 570495 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 3000 N Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 6000 N 260 g 570496 CE 570496 3000 N 6000 N 600 g 570497 CE 570497 3000 N 6000 N 630 g Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 70 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML Order reference 15 Order reference Features System 15.1 Product type PSEN ml s 1.1 unit Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, coded, for series con-

nection Mechanical safety gate switch with guard locking, coded, for series con-

nection Actuator, coded PSEN ml s 1.1 switch PSEN ml 1.1 actu-

ator 12-pin M12 connector Order no. 570 406 12-pin M12 connector 570 407 15.2 Accessories Installation accessories Product type PSEN ml escape re-

lease PSEN ml escape re-

lease extension PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 1.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 4.0m PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door PSEN ml bracket swinging door 70 Features Escape release stationary Extension escape release stationary 25 mm Escape release with push/pull cable 1.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 2 m Escape release external with push/pull cable 2.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.0 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 4 m Mounting plate for installing the safety switch, with 4 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head locking screw, M5x40 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x16 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. 570 480 Order no. 570 460 570 462 570 470 570 471 570 472 570 473 570 474 570 475 570490 570 492 570 493 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 71 Order reference Product type PSEN ml bracket swinging door 80 PSEN ml door handle sliding door PSEN ml door handle swinging door 70 PSEN ml door handle swinging door 80 PSEN screw set bracket swinging door PSEN screw set bracket sliding door Features Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x16. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a swing gate Order no. 570 494 570 495 570 496 570 497 570498 Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a sliding gate 570499 Cable Product type PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 3m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 5m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf, 20m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 30m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 0.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 2m Features 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0.5 m 1 m 1.5 m 2 m Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 540 333 540 321 540 320 540 319 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight 540 345 540 346 540 347 540 326 540 340 72 Order reference Product type PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 20m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 30m PSEN cable M12-12sf 2m PSEN cable M12-12sf 3m PSEN cable M12-12sf 5m PSEN cable M12-12sf 10m PSEN cable M12-12sf 20m PSEN cable M12-12sf 30m PSEN cable M12-12sf 50m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 1m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 2m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 3m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 5m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 10m Features 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 2 m 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 50 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 5 m 10 m 570 352 570 351 570 350 540 344 540 343 540 342 540 341 M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight 570 358 570 359 570 360 570 353 570 354 570 355 570 356 570 357 570 361 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 73 Order reference Product type PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 20m Features 20 m Series connection Features Product type PSEN ml Y junction M12 PSEN ml end ad-

apter PSEN ml / PSENcs Y junction M12 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight 570 362 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 12-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 12-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector 570 486 570 487 570 489 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 74 Appendix 16 Appendix The following check list is intended as a guide to provide support during commissioning, re-

commissioning and the prescribed regular testing of the PSEN ml s 1.1. Note that the check list is not intended to replace the plant-specific safety analysis required for commissioning/recommissioning, nor the resulting inspections and actions. INFORMATION Commissioning, recommissioning and regular inspection may only be car-

ried out by qualified personnel. We recommend that you keep the completed check list and store it with the machine docu-

mentation for reference. Date Action Safety switch Number Actuator Number OK Not OK Notes Signature Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 75 EC declaration of conformity 17 EC declaration of conformity This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-

chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads. Authorised representative: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfildern, Germany Operating Manual PSEN ml s 1.1 1004670-EN-01 76 Front cover y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

8 1 0 2

, 1 0

-

N E

-

0 7 6 4 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnical support is available from Pilz round the clock. AmericasBrazil+55 11 97569-2804Canada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexico+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsiaChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281South Korea+82 31 450 0680Australia+61 3 95600621EuropeAustria+43 1 7986263-0Belgium, Luxembourg+32 9 3217575France+33 3 88104000Germany+49 711 3409-444Ireland+353 21 4804983Italy, Malta+39 0362 1826711Scandinavia+45 74436332Spain+34 938497433Switzerland+41 62 88979-30The Netherlands+31 347 320477Turkey+90 216 5775552United Kingdom+44 1536 462203You can reach our international hotline on: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PAScong, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, THE SPIRIT OF SAFETY are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using ecological materials and energy-saving technologies. Oces and production facilities are ecologically designed, environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz oers sustainability, plus the security of using energy-ecient products and environmentally-friendly solutions.Pilz GmbH & Co. KG Felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostldern, GermanyTel.: +49 711 3409-0 Fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.com200XXXX-EN-0X0-0-2-3-000, 2017-00 Printed in Germany Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2017

 

 

PSEN ml s 2.1

} PSEN sensor technology Operating Manual-1004710-EN-01 Preface This document is the original document. All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made for the user's internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documenta-

tion will be gratefully received. Source code from third-party manufacturers or open source software has been used for some components. The relevant licence information is available on the Internet on the Pilz homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. SD means Secure Digital Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 Validity of documentation Using the documentation Definition of symbols Safety 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 Intended use Safety regulations Safety assessment Additional documents that apply Use of qualified personnel Warranty and liability Disposal For your safety Overview 3.1 3.2 Unit features Scope of supply Function description 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 Structure Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) Activation with specification of direction Activation without specification of direction Safety Device Diagnostics Operating modes Block diagram Auxiliary release Recommissioning Prevent restart Escape release Recommissioning Wiring 5.1 5.2 5.3 Important information Pin assignment, connector and cable EMC requirements Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 Important information Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Single connection Series connection Connection to Pilz evaluation devices Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 6 6 6 6 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 15 15 16 16 20 21 22 22 23 24 25 25 25 26 27 27 27 29 30 33 34 3 Contents Section 7 Section 8 Teaching in the actuator 7.1 7.2 PSEN ml 2.1 PSEN ml 2.2 Installation 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 Important information Tapped hole Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Install fixing screws side-on to actuator Centre the bolt in the actuator housing Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 Installation on sliding gate Installation on swing gate Installation with mounting bracket Installation with mounting plate Installing the escape release Important information Installation positions for escape release Installation stationary escape release Installation external escape release Uninstalling the escape release Section 9 Adjustment Section 10 Operation 10.1 10.2 Normal mode Error display Section 11 Checks and maintenance Section 12 Dimensions Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Technical details 13.1 13.2 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I Safety characteristic data Supplementary data 14.1 14.2 14.3 Radio approval Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit Order reference System 15.1 15.2 Accessories Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 35 35 35 36 36 37 39 39 40 40 42 43 45 45 46 46 47 48 50 53 54 55 55 57 58 59 66 69 70 72 72 72 72 73 73 73 4 Contents Section 16 Appendix Section 17 EC declaration of conformity 77 78 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 5 Introduction 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Validity of documentation This documentation is valid for the product PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 from Version 2.0. This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and provides guidelines on how to connect the product. Using the documentation This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-

erence. Definition of symbols Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:

DANGER!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. WARNING!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. CAUTION!

This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. NOTICE This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-

aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-

ance. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 6 Introduction INFORMATION This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-

tures. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 7 Safety 2 2.1 Safety Intended use The safety gate system is used for interlocking and guard locking swing gates and sliding gates. The safety gate system can be operated in two ways:

} Unlocking with condition The safety gate system prevents the safety gate from being unlocked while there is any hazard within the danger zone.

} Unlocking without condition The operator can unlock the safety gate system at any time. After starting the unlock-

ing, the guard locking creates a stop command. The time required to unlock the inter-

locking guard has to be longer than the time required to stop the hazardous machine function. The hazardous machine function may only be executed under the following conditions:

} There is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 and

} There is a low signal at safety outputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/Un-

lock Request 2). Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) may only be operated under the following condition:

} Plant is in a safe condition Make sure that this is the case with an AND operation in the safety system immediately before the output is operated. The safety switch meets the requirements in accordance with:

} EN 60947-5-3 with the actuator PSEN ml 2.1: PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Coding level High, type 4 The safety switch may only be used with the corresponding actuator PSEN ml 2.1. The safety level PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 is only achieved if

}

} The solenoid has 2-channel operation via safe, tested outputs, suitable for PL e (Cat. the safety outputs use 2-channel processing 4)/SIL CL 3 applications. With 1-channel operation of the safety inputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/

Unlock Request 2) it is only possible to achieve safety level PLd(Cat.2)/SILCL2. Foreseeable misuse

} Safety switches and actuators of the safety gate system PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 must not be used as mechanical limit stops

} Use of the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 under corrosive environmental conditions (cooling emul-

sions, surface treatment, gases, ) Please contact Pilz. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 8 Safety 2.2 2.2.1 Safety regulations Safety assessment Before using a device it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the Machinery Directive. Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-

quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-

isational standpoint. 2.2.2 Additional documents that apply 2.2.3 Please read and take note of the following documents. Only for use of the Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD):

} Operating manual for the fieldbus module, for example SDD ES ETH or SDD ES PROFIBUS

} System description "Safety Device Diagnostics"

For the use of passive junctions:

} Operating manual of a passive junction, for example:

PSEN ix2 F4 code PSEN ix2 F8 code PDP67 F 4 code You will need to be conversant with the information in these documents in order to fully un-

derstand this operating manual. Use of qualified personnel The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned by competent persons. A competent person is a qualified and knowledgeable person who, because of their train-

ing, experience and current professional activity, has the specialist knowledge required. To be able to inspect, assess and operate devices, systems and machines, the person has to be informed of the state of the art and the applicable national, European and international laws, directives and standards. It is the companys responsibility only to employ personnel who

} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-

tion,

} Have read and understood the information provided in the section entitled Safety

} Have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the spe-

cific application. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 9 Safety 2.2.4 2.2.5 Warranty and liability All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if

} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended,

} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual,

} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified,

} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB boards, soldering work etc.). Disposal

}

In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-

lated characteristic data.

} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act). 2.3 For your safety WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to substituting an actuator from the interlocking and guard locking system Substituting an actuator for an inappropriate actuator may lead to serious in-

jury and death. You should prevent the interlocking and guard locking system from being manipulated with an inappropriate actuator. Keep the substitute actuator in a safe place and protect it from unau-

thorised access. If substitute actuators are used, these must be installed as described under Installation [

36]

If the original actuators are replaced with substitute actuators, the ori-

ginal actuators must be destroyed before disposal.

} Do not remove the connector's protective cap until you are just about to connect the unit. This will prevent potential contamination. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 10 Overview 3 3.1 Overview Unit features

} Safe guard locking for swing gates and sliding gates

} Safe interlocking (position monitoring)

} Transponder technology

}

}

} Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD) 2 safety inputs for series connection of multiple safety switches 2 safety outputs Safety Device Diagnostics can be used to poll sensor information, to perform ac-

tions and to read configuration parameters Manipulation protection in accordance with ISO 14119 (chap. 7.2.d) is possible by verifying the short name of the actuator through the controller via SDD communica-

tion

} Diagnostic input for Y1 for Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD)

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 for Safety Device Diagnostics

} Monitoring of shorts between the safety outputs

} Guard locking element keeps the safety gate from being opened unintentionally

} Auxiliary release for opening the safety gate

}

} Suitable for left and right hinged safety gates

} Pilz type of coding: Fully coded/uniquely coded

} M12, 12-pin male connector

}

1 signal output LEDs:

Supply voltage/fault Status of actuator Status of guard locking Status of safety inputs S11 and S21

} The bolt in the actuator can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing before the actuator is installed. As a result, the actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally.

} The safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 can be expanded using a stationary or external escape release (see Order reference: Accessories [

The stationary escape release can be expanded by 25 mm max. two times. The external escape releases are available with push/pull cables between 1.5and4m in length (grading 50cm). 73]). 3.2 Scope of supply

} Scope of supply PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 Safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 11 Function description 4 4.1 Function description Structure The interlocking and guard locking system prevents the safety gates to the danger zone from being opened while there is any hazard within the danger zone (machine movement, voltage, ...). The safety outputs may have a high or low signal, depending on the position of the actuator and the signal path of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). Gate closed Gate open Safety outputs 12 and 22 Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

} Actuator is detected and

} Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) and

} There is a high signal at the inputs S11 and S21 If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Feasibility monitoring for safety inputs S11 and S21

}

If one safety input switches from high to low, while the other safety input remains high, an unequal status is displayed: Input LED flashes yellow If this safety input switches back from low to high, while the other safety input remains high, a feasibility error is displayed and a partial operation lock is triggered: Input LED flashes yellow

}

A switch to a high signal will only lead to normal switch operation if both inputs had a low signal. From this moment on, the switch to high may occur (partial operation lock see Error display [

57]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 12 Safety switchActuatorSafety switchActuator Function description

} Diagnostic input Y1 If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is automatically activ-

ated and data is read. If no fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is not used.

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 The status of the actuator is output. If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the signal output/diagnostic output for the writing of data is activated. 4.2 Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation)

}

If there is a low signal at safety inputs S31 and S41, the guard locking pin does not change its position.

} Guard locking may only be deactivated once the hazardous movement has been com-

pleted. Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics

} The safety inputs S31 and S41 have a high signal within max. 500 ms after the receipt of the guard locking activation. Single connection Guard locking is activated through a high signal (length 350 - 400 ms ) at inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse (length 350 - 400 ms ) at these inputs deactivates guard locking. Series connection In a series connection with n safety switches the safety lock is activated by a high signal with a minimum length of t=n*(350 - 400 ms) at the inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid opera-

tion). Number of safety switches in the series connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Request in ms 350 700 1050 1400 1750 2100 After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse of the specified length at these in-

puts deactivates guard locking. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 13 Function description Legend

[1] PSEN ml Y junction M12

[2] PSEN ml end adapter

} Series connection of the OSSD outputs

} Series connection of diagnostics with Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 14 3 x PSEN ml sX1X2X3X1X2X3X1X2Safety control system8-core12-core[1][2]S21S111222S21S1112221. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlY1Y32Y1Y321. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlFieldbus module Function description

} Series connection of the solenoid operation 4.2.1 Activation with specification of direction

} The guard locking is activated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S31 before S41).

} The guard locking is deactivated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S41 before S31). Legend tmax Maximum time between the rising edges from S31 and S42 4.2.2 Activation without specification of direction

} The guard locking changes its state when the time between the rising edges from S31 and S41<20ms. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 15 S31S413242S31S4132421. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlS31S41tmaxGuard lockingS31S41tmaxGuard locking Function description 4.3 Safety Device Diagnostics Safety Device Diagnostics is an option that can be selected independently of the safety-re-

lated wiring. When using the Safety Device Diagnostics, up to 16 sensors connected in series can be connected as a subscriber to a fieldbus module. The communication of the sensors with the fieldbus module is automatically built up again with each new supply of the supply voltage. As a result, a sensor can be exchanged, e.g. when servicing, without the need for special measures. An exchange can be detected via the fieldbus module e.g. through the serial number.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module:

Poll information of the sensors (examples: what sensor in the series has switched, at what point could there be an open circuit in the series connection) Read configuration parameters of the sensor (examples: Number of teach-in pro-

cesses remaining, serial number of the switch) Perform actions (example: poll updated actuator name) Selectively activate or deactivate guard locking of individual PSEN ml within a series connection The results of the sensor diagnostics can be checked already during the installation phase via the display in the fieldbus module, without the need to connect the fieldbus module to the network.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module for simple wiring:

Information is passed on via the fieldbus module directly to the network Mappings of the signal outputs to the sensor are automated by the SDD. This prevents wiring errors and an expansion or reduction of the sensors is possible without the need to change existing wiring. Wiring in accordance with IP20: Rapid installation in the control cabined is enabled. Wiring in accordance with IP67: Various passive junctions can be used (see Order references for accessories [

cable from the field in the control cabinet. 73]) to connect several sensors with only one Further information on Safety Device Diagnostics can be found in Additional documents that apply [

9]. 4.4 Operating modes The safety switch can be used in various operating modes.

} Operation without safety device diagnostics Standard operating mode After every restart the safety switch is in operation without Safety Device Dia-

gnostics. No communication with Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 16 Function description Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Safety switch supplies diagnostic data to Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with active use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Activate/deactivate the guard locking by a combination of a Safety Device Dia-

gnostics command and the status of the safety inputs S31 and S41 (S31 and S41 must have a high signal). The safety requirements are guaranteed by the signals S31 and S41 (the fieldbus for Safety Device Diagnostics communication is not safe).

} Operation with specification of direction when activating/deactivating he guard locking A specification of direction can be used to control the change of the guard locking status. Toggling: The safety switch changes with each simultaneous controlling of S31 and S41 the guard locking status (activated <-> deactivated). Force Direction: The safety switch is selectively activated or deactivated by offset activation of the rising edges of S31 and S41. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 17 Function description Timing diagrams Fig.: Passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] The door connected upstream in the series connection is closed

[3] The door connected upstream in the series connection is locked

[4] Gate is closed

[5] Guard locking is activated by the programmable safety system

[6] Guard locking is activated

[7] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[8] Outputs will be deactivated

[9] Guard locking will be deactivated

[10] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 18

[1][4][5][8][9][7][t1][t1][t2][t2][2][3]32 + 42[10]Guard lockingActuator Function description Fig.: Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] The door connected upstream in the series connection is closed

[3] The door connected upstream in the series connection is locked

[4] Gate is closed

[5] Guard locking is activated by the programmable safety system

[6] Guard locking is activated

[7] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[8] Outputs will be deactivated

[9] Guard locking will be deactivated

[10] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 19

[7][1][4][5][8][9][t1][t1][t2][t2][2][3]32 + 42[10]SDD command guard lockingGuard lockingActuator Function description 4.5 Block diagram Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 20 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLockPowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1S11S213242&&&&Function description 4.6 Auxiliary release The auxiliary release enables guard locking to be opened from the access side to the danger zone. The safety switch has auxiliary releases on three sides. INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Op-

eration) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Legend

[1] Auxiliary release screw Torx T10

[2] Security screw Torx T10, sealed with varnish when delivered Mode of operation:

1. Remove the security screw [2] using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] half a turn anti-clockwise using a Torx T10 screw-

driver. The guard locking pin is displaced and the bolt is released. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 21

[1][2]Function description The safety gate to the danger zone can be opened. 4.6.1 Recommissioning Recommission PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] (see Figure [

Torx T10 screwdriver. 21]) half a turn clockwise using a 2. Re-insert the security screw [2] (see Figure [

3. Seal the security screw with varnish. 4. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 5. Carry out a function test on the safety switch and actuator. The safety function may only 21]) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. be checked by qualified personnel. INFORMATION If the auxiliary release screw is not turned back correctly after use, the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 switches to a fault condition. 4.7 Prevent restart To prevent the machine restarting (unintentionally) while there is someone inside the danger zone, a padlock can be attached via the through hole on the actuator (see diagram). As a result the actuator cannot engage with the safety switch, guard locking is not activated and the machine is prevented from starting. Legend

[1] Through hole on the actuator for attaching a padlock

[2] Padlock

[3] Actuator If the actuator is to blocked using several locks in parallel, a multiple lock can be used (e.g. Brady Lockout device, article no.852439). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 22

[1][2][3]Function description 4.8 Escape release Distinction between escape release and emergency release

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from outside the hazardous area.

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from within the hazardous area and it corresponds to an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed within the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed outside the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. Legend

[1] Escape release stationary

[2] Escape release externally

[3] Tension pressure cables in lengths of 1.50m to 4m

[4] Button of the escape release pin

[5] Escape release pin INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Op-

eration) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 23

[1][2][3][4][5]Function description Mode of operation If in the hazardous area the button of the escape release pin [4] is pressed towards the safety gate, the escape release impacts directly on the auxiliary release of the safety switch and the auxiliary release unlocks the safety gate. The safety gate can be opened immedi-

ately, enabling the operator to leave the danger zone. There is a low signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 if the escape release was operated. Scope

} Scope of supply stationary escape release 1 escape release stationary 1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk

} Scope of supply external escape release 73]) 1 escape release external with installed push/pull cables (see Order reference:

Accessories [

1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk 4.8.1 Recommissioning 1. Pull back the button of the escape release pin. 2. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 3. Carry out a function test using the escape release. The safety function may only be checked by qualified personnel. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 24 Wiring 5 5.1 5.2 Wiring Important information

} Hand-tighten the connector.

}

Information given in the Technical details [

66] must be followed. Pin assignment, connector and cable 12-pin M12 male connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Function

+24 V UB 0 V UB Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 2) Safety output channel 1 Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 1) Safety output channel 2 Safety input channel 1 Signal output/diagnostic output Diagnostics input Safety input channel 2 Operation of solenoid of the next safety switch in the series connection (channel 1) Operation of solenoid of the next safety switch in the series connection (channel 2) Terminal designation A1 A2 S41 Cable colour (Pilz cable) Brown Blue White 12 S31 22 S11 Y32 Y1 S21 32 42 Green Pink Yellow Black Grey Red Purple Grey-pink Red-blue Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 25 Wiring 5.3 NOTICE The colour marking for the connection lead only applies for the cable that Pilz supplies as an accessory EMC requirements

} Ensure the wiring and EMC requirements of EN 60204-1 are met.

} UL requirement: The supply voltage to the safety switch must be protected with a quick-

acting fuse (see Technical details [

66]).

} The inputs and outputs of the safety switch must have a protective separation to voltages over 60 V AC.

} The power supply must meet the regulations for extra low voltages with protective sep-

aration (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN60204-1. INFORMATION Only use safety relays with a 24 VDC supply voltage. Safety relays with a wide-range power supply or in AC device versions have internal potential isolation and are not suitable as evaluation devices. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 26 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6 6.1 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Important information Make sure that the selected evaluation device has the following properties:

}

2-channel with feasibility monitoring Both OSSDs must change switch state synchronously. In particular, the evaluation device must monitor that the state of both OSSDs was "Gate unlocked" before both re-

turn to the "Gate locked" state and vice-versa.

} OSSD signals are evaluated through 2 channels

} The state of the OSSDs must be tested before and after safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated (solenoid operation) (see Timing diagram [

18]) WARNING!

Potential loss of safety function due to failure to test for a safe condition Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. Use an evaluation device/safety system to test whether the plant is in a safe condition. Do not operate the solenoid of the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 via S31/S41 unless the plant is in a safe condition.

} The use of Safety Device Diagnostics is described in the System Description "Safety Device Diagnostics". 6.2 Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Use in PL e (Cat. 4) applications

} Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) have 2-channel operation via safe out-

puts, which are suitable for PL e (Cat. 4) applications 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Monitoring of shorts across signal cables through activation of guard locking Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 27 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 3) applications

}

2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) via relay out-

puts 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Exclusion of shorts across signal cables through appropriate measures (e.g. protected cable layout, see EN ISO 13849-2) Legend

[1] Protected cable layout Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 28 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 1S11S21Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuator22Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensorLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 124 V[1]A1A224 V0 VS11S21Programmable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 2) applications

}

}

}

1-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) 2-channel processing of safety outputs 1-channel operation for interconnected safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), with 1A 6.3 Single connection Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 29 Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuator22Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensorLock/Unlock RequestA1A224 V0 VS11S2124 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1S11S21ActuatorSafety switchProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.4 Series connection CAUTION!

Extension of delay-on de-energisation When several (n) devices are connected in series, the delay-on de-ener-

gisation time adds with the number of interconnected safety switches. The max. delay-on de-energisation is made up of the risk time (see Technical details [

+ (n-1) x max. delay-on de-energisation of the inputs

+ max. delay-on de-energisation of the evaluation device 66]) The safety switches PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 are suitable for series connection with max. 16 safety switches. In practice, the maximum possible number will be limited by the following parameters, among others:

} The required SIL level (e.g. SIL CL 3),

}

}

} Cable length (see notes on cable lengths),

} Height of supply voltage. Ensure there is sufficient supply voltage, taking inrush currents and fusing into considera-

tion. the required performance level (e.g. PL e (Cat. 4)), the maximum delay or risk time permitted by the application, Notes on cable lengths

} Determine the values under the following conditions:

Room temperature (25C), conductor cross section 0.25mm2, output load per output

(12,22,Y32) each 10mA Legend

[1] Safety control system

[2] Safety switch PSEN ml Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 30

[1]L1[2][2][2]L2L3L4L5L6[2][2][2]Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Examples for cable lengths

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 20.4 V L4 L3 L2 Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 24 V L1 50 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 10 m 5 m 20 m 10 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 10 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m L4 L3 L2 Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 28.8 V L1 120 m 60 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 20 m 60 m 50 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m L5 L6 5 m 5 m 5 m L5 L6 10 m 20 m 20 m Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 L2 L1 180 m 130 m 50 m 80 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m L3 L4 L5 L6 50 m 50 m 30 m 20 m 30 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m Overall length 50 m 50 m 40 m 35 m 30 m 30 m Overall length 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m Overall length 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 31 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices For connecting the safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 in a series connection there are the fol-

lowing options:

} Wiring with the safety control system via PSEN ml Y junction Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 32 24 V0 VA1A21222S21S11FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32423212221222A1A2A1A2RxTxS21S11I2I1S21S113242S31S414232S31S41O2O1Y1Y32Y1Y32Y1ActuatorSafety switchFieldbus moduleSafety control systemSafety switchSafety switchActuatorActuator Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.5 Legend

[1] PSEN ml Y junction M12

[2] PSEN ml end adapter

} When establishing the series connections with connection to the safety control system, use the following adapters:

PSEN ml Y junction M12 PSEN ml end adapter

} Connection in the control cabinet at the terminal block Connect the 12-core cables of the safety switch to the terminal block of the control cabinet. Connection to Pilz evaluation devices The safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 can be connected to Pilz evaluation devices, for ex-

ample. Suitable Pilz evaluation devices are, for example:

} PNOZmulti for safety gate monitoring Configure the switch in the PNOZmulti Configurator with switch type 3.

} PSS for safety gate monitoring with standard function block SB064, SB066 or FS_SafetyGate

} PSSuniversal PLC for safety gate monitoring with function block FS_SafetyGate The correct connection to the respective evaluation device is described in the operating manual for the evaluation device. Make sure that the connection is made in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual for the selected evaluation device. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 33 3 x PSEN ml sX1X2X3X1X2X3X1X2Safety control system8-core12-core[1][2]Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Connection to PNOZmulti is illustrated by way of example. 6.5.1 Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 34 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSEN ml0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)Rx16S11S21Tx32421112Activation of guard locking via SDD ES modulefollowing PSEN ml Teaching in the actuator 7 7.1 Teaching in the actuator PSEN ml 2.1 Teaching in the actuator for the first time:

The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 66]) is To teach in a new actuator:

} A maximum of 8 learning procedures are possible. 1. The actuator that is to be taught in must be brought into the safety switch's response range as the only transponder. As soon as the actuator is detected, the "Safety Gate"

LED will flash yellow. 2. After 20 s has elapsed, the "Safety Gate" LED turns to quick yellow flashes. Trigger a system reset in the next 120 s by interrupting the power supply. 3. When the supply voltage is switched back on, the learning procedure is complete and the number of permitted additional learning procedures is reduced by 1. NOTICE The actuator must not be removed during the learning procedure. This actuator cannot be retaught on the same safety switch. 7.2 PSEN ml 2.2 The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 66]) is NOTICE No other actuator may be taught in once this actuator has been taught. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 35 Installation 8 8.1 Installation Important information INFORMATION Refer to the guidelines for designing guards and integrating interlocks with guard locking in ENISO14120. NOTICE Install the safety switch and actuator so that the possibilities of defeat are reduced to a minimum (see guidelines for reducing the possibilities for de-

feating interlocking devices in EN ISO 14119). NOTICE Install safety switch and actuator so that it is not possible to reach through with hand or finger.

} The safety switch and actuator should be installed opposite each other in parallel.

} Make sure that the actuator makes complete contact with the mounting surface.

} Make sure that the at least one of the auxiliary release/escape releases can be oper-

ated after installation.

} For a minimum screw depth of 6 mm, M5 screws with resistance class 8.8 should be used to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

66].

} Use non-removable flat head locking screws to attach the safety switch and actuator

(e.g. cheese-head or pan head screws) or rivets.

} Use the same type of screw to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Prevent self-loosening of the fastening elements on the safety switch and actuator, On the safety switch: through torque (see Technical details [

On the actuator: through torque (see Technical details [

66]) 66]) and bonded screw retention

} Make sure that the actuator does not present a risk.

} The mounting surfaces for safety switches and actuators can have a max. unevenness of 0.5 mm.

} Prevent the safety switch and actuator being exposed to heavy shock or vibration.

} The fastening of safety switch and actuator has to be sufficiently stable to ensure the proper operation of the safety switch and the actuator. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 36 Installation 8.2 Tapped hole

} To fix the safety switch at the three possible mounting positions, there are 3 drill holes on 3 sides. As a result, the safety switch can be installed on the frames of left and right hinged slid-

ing gates and swing gates. If necessary use a Mounting plate [

bracket [

Different holding forces arise, based on the installation. Fixing screws in parallel to actuator [

45] (see Order reference: Accessories [

45] or Mounting 73]). 39]:

Holding forceFZh=7.500 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=15.000 N Fixing screws side-on to actuator [

39]:

Holding forceFZh=5.000 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=10.000 N INFORMATION Please note that the stated holding forces only apply when installed without a mounting bracket. The holding forces when installed with a mounting bracket can be found in the table "Technical details for mounting bracket [

72]". The tapped holes must have a depth of at least 6 mm. Installation of safety switch Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, no mounting plate Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, with mounting plate Tapped hole Tapped holes for four M5 screws on the mounting surface. Tapped holes for two M8 screws on the mounting surface, for attaching the mount-

ing plate. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 37 Installation Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, no mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, with mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Actuator, no mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M5 screws (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 38 3119,2193,54,5 8,5 5,35 1048 Installation Actuator, with mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M6 screws (see Dimensions).

(Diagram: order no. 570 492 as example) 8.3 Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Use four M5 screws to attach the switch to the mounting surface.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

66]. Fig.: Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Legend

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator 8.4 Install fixing screws side-on to actuator

[1] Front of safety switch

[2] Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 39 6,5XY[3][3][1][2][1][2]Installation Use four screws [1] to fix the safety switch to the mount-

ing surface. Fully tighten the four screws

[1] on the safety switch. Torque setting: Please note the information provided un-

der Technical details [

66]. 8.5 Centre the bolt in the actuator housing The bolt must be centred in the actuator housing in order to maintain the distances on set-

tling gates. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing (see diagram). Bolt centred within the actuator hous-

ing Bolt not centred within the actuator housing 8.6 Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 The actuator can be installed vertically on a gate (see Figure [

ator horizontally, the bolt can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing prior to installation. 1. On the housing skin [3] in the actuator housing, press down the spring plate [1] on both 12]). To install the actu-

sides of the bolt and keep the plate held down. 2. Rotate the bolt in the housing skin by 90 in the required direction ([2]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 40

[1][1][1][1]Installation Legend

[1] Spring plate in the housing skin

[2] Bolt, can be rotated 90

[3] Housing skin 3. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing [

40]. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 41

[1][2][3]Installation 8.7 Installation on sliding gate Legend

[1] Safety switch, installed on gate frame

[2] Actuator with mounting bracket (available as Accessory [

sliding gate 73]), installed on 1. Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

39] or side-on to actuator [

39] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 42

[1][2]Installation 8.8 Installation on swing gate Fig.: Swing gate with internal and external hinge Legend

[1]

[2]

1. Safety switch on gate frame Actuator, installed on swing gate Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

39] or side-on to actuator [

39] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. The actuator should engage smoothly into the safety switch. Install the safety switch horizontally at a swing gate Please note:

Depending on the installation boundary conditions, a larger gate radius may be required

(see diagram). Please contact Pilz when smaller gate radiuses are required. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 43

[1][2][2]Installation Make sure that a slight shift of the rotation point of the door is maintained when installing the actuator. Legend R The distance of the upper part of the safety switch from the rotation point of the door X Parallel shift of the actuator Tilt angle when installing the actuator

} Tilt the actuator during installation by 10 in the following situations:

50 mm < X < 75 mm and R < 600 mm X < 50 mm and R < 500 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 44 Installation 8.9 Installation with mounting bracket 1. Use two M6 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the gate. The position of the drill holes can be taken from the section entitled Dimensions. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the mounting bracket. Fig.: Actuator, installed on mounting bracket 8.10 Installation with mounting plate 1. Attach the mounting plate to the swing gate/sliding gate. 2. Use four M5 screws to fix the safety switch [

39] to the mounting plate. Fig.: Safety switch, installed on mounting plate Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 45 Installation 8.11 Installing the escape release 8.11.1 Important information WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to the incorrect installation of the escape re-

lease!

If the button of the escape release pin is accessible from the outside, the guard locking device can be released from the outside and the safety gates opened, although the hazardous machine is switched on. Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. The escape release should be installed so that it is only accessible from in-

side the danger zone.

} The button of the escape release pin must be impossible to reach from a position out-

side the protected area.

} Make sure that the escape release cannot be operated unintentionally.

} Prevent the effect of transverse forces on the escape release.

} Secure the screw joints with a with a threadlocker.

} Ensure that the button of the escape release pin is clearly visible and that is it not covered.

} Make sure that the min. bending radius of the push/pull cable of60mm is maintained when using the external escape release.

} Make sure that the button of the escape release pin does not present a risk.

} The mounting surface has to completely cover the bottom of the escape release hous-

ing. The bottom of the escape release housing must not be accessible after installation. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 46 Installation 8.11.2 Installation positions for escape release The stationary escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in three dif-

ferent directions each. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 47

[1][2]Installation The external escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in four different directions each. The push/pull cable can be led out on different sides. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back 8.11.3 Installation stationary escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 48

[1][2]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The button of the escape release pin can be removed for the installation (e.g. when the escape release pin is to be run through a wall). The button of the escape release pin must be secured again with a threadlocker and hand-tightened after escape release in-

stallation is complete

} To bridge larger distances the escape release pin can be extended by a max. of 25mm two times (see Order reference: Accessories [

73]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 49

[1][2][3]Installation Legend

[1] Button of the escape release pin

[2] Escape release pin 8.11.4 Installation external escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 50

[2][1]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 51

[1][2][3]Installation 4. Screw the housing of the escape release with the screws [1] to a mounting surface with 6 - 6,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The screws of the push/pull cable [2] can be loosened to make installation easier (e.g. when the push/pull cable is to be run through a wall). The screws must be fixed with 6 -

6,5 Nm after the escape release is installed. Legend

[1] Screwing the escape release to the mounting area

[2] Screwing the cable Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 52

[1][1][2]Installation 8.11.5 Uninstalling the escape release If the push/pull cable is to be run through a conduit pipe, the cable has to be uninstalled at the escape release first. Prerequisites

} The conduit pipe must have a diameter of at least 12mm. Procedure:

1. Lift off the cover [1] (e.g. with a screwdriver with a flat blade). Legend

[1] Cover

[2] Nut M10 x 0,75

[3] Fork head

[4] Slot nut 2. Loosen the nut [2]. 3. Pull out the push/pull cable with the slot nut [4] and remove the slot nut and the nut [2]

from the cable. 4. Run the cable through the conduit pipe. 5. Push the nut [2] and the slot nut [4] over the fork head [3] back on the cable. 6. Push the cable with the fork head [3] on the fork in the escape release. The slot nut [4]

must be fitted into the nut again. 7. Tighten the nut [2] with 6 - 6,5 Nm. 8. Put the lid [1] back on. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 53

[1][2][4][3]Adjustment 9 Adjustment Please note:

} Safety switch and actuator must be aligned correctly

} Distances are maintained as stated in the following diagram

} Actuator is centred (see Centre bolt in actuator housing [

} Always test the function with a connected evaluation device.

} When installing an external or stationary escape release, check the function of the es-

40]) cape release with a connected evaluation device. View from above View from the side Perspective view

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Max. lateral offset

+/-3,0 mm

[4] Max. vertical offset

+/-3,0 mm

[5] Max. angular offset around the X axis +/-2,0 deg

[6] Max. angular offset around the Y axis +/-2,5 deg

[7] Max. angular offset around the Z axis +/-7,5 deg

[8] Max. offset in closing direction

+/-2 mm Attach safety switch and actuator Once the safety switch and actuator are correctly aligned, the actuator's screw connection must be tightened. 1. Tighten up one M5 screw. 2. For applications with increased safety requirements (e.g. SIL CL 2 PL d), swap the second M5 screw for an M5 locking screw. 3. Tighten up the M5 screw or M5 locking screw. Please note the max. torque setting stated in the Technical details [

66]. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 54

[7][3][1][2][6][8][4][2][1][5][2][1]Operation 10 Operation NOTICE The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be checked by qualified personnel. Status indicators:

}

}

}

}

"Device" LED illuminates green: The unit is ready for operation

"Safety Gate" LED lights up yellow: Actuator is within the response range

"Lock" LED lights up green: Guard locking active

"Input" LED lights independently of the status of safety inputs S11 and S21 Legend:

LED off LED on LED flashes (500 ms on, 500 ms off) LED flashes quickly (50 ms on, 950 ms off) LED flashes very quickly (25 ms on, 475 ms off) 10.1 Normal mode LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 is started Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Green Green Green Yellow Yel-

low Yel-

low Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are low Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are high Safety gate closed, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are high Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 55 Operation LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking activated Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Warnings LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Display not defin-

itive Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detected, guard locking cannot be activated / deac-

tivated The supply voltage to safety inputs S31 and S41 was switched back on before the auxili-

ary release screw was turned back. Safety switch active despite over or under-

voltage Green Red Display not defin-

itive Display not defin-

itive Yel-

low Yel-

low Display not definitive Green Partial operation:

One input is low, after both inputs were high Partial operation lock:

One input is low, after both inputs were high Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 Remedy / meas-

ure Check the actu-

ator's alignment [

to the safety switch. 54]

Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on (see Recommissionin g [

22]). Check the supply voltage. If safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated or de-

activated while an undervoltage warning is present, the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Open both inputs

(switch to normal operation). Open both in-

puts. This will cancel the lock. 56 Operation LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Display not defin-

itive Red Green Yel-

low Switch status Partial operation lock:

Both inputs are high Remedy / meas-

ure 10.2 Error display LED status Switch status Remedy / measure Device Safety Gate Input Lock Red Yellow Display not definitive Safety switch de-

activated due to under or over-

voltage Yel-

low Check the supply voltage and switch the supply voltage off and then on again. Previous LED display is retained Display not definitive Safety outputs in fault condition Auxiliary release/

escape release activated Display not definitive Error Safety switch does not start Check the wiring and switch the supply voltage off and then on again.

} Auxiliary release: Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on

(see Recommissioning [

22]).

} Escape release: Pull the button of the escape release pin back again and then switch on the voltage supply again (see Re-

commissioning under escape release [

24]). Please contact Pilz. Change the safety switch. Red Red Red Green Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Wrong actuator Use the actuator PSEN ml 2.1. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 57 Checks and maintenance 11 Checks and maintenance Regular inspection of the switch function is required to guarantee the trouble-free, long-

term function. If the interlock and guard locking system is only used rarely (opening and closing the safety gate and activating/deactivating the guard locking device), a manual function test is re-

quired. The correct function of the device should be checked at regular intervals and after each er-

ror. Test intervals in accordance with EN ISO 14119:

}

}

for SIL CL 3/PL e at least 1x per month for SIL CL 2/PL d at least 1x per year The Appendix contains a Check list [

77], which should help you perform the test. Visual inspection:

} Check that the seal on the security screw on the auxiliary release is intact. If the seal is not intact, make sure that the security screw is inserted and use varnish to seal the se-

curity screw.

} Check the safety switch and actuator for damage.

} Make sure that the safety switch and actuator are firmly secured.

} Check the offset of the safety switch and actuator. Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset Max. vertical offset

} Check that the wiring is correct.

} Remove any dirt from the safety switch and actuator. Function test

} The actuator is detected and at the safety outputs 12 and 22 there is a high signal after detection of the actuator.

} The guard locking device can be activated/deactivated when the safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated.

} Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

Actuator is detected and Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) and There is a high signal at the inputs S11 and S21 If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Escape release

} Test whether the button of the escape release pin can be detected and reached.

} Check the function of the escape release. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 58 Dimensions 12 Dimensions Safety switch Distance between safety switch mounting surface and actuator mounting surface Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 59 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,52953674069,5 Dimensions Mounting plate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570490 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 60 25512,543,25193,5204,531280(12,5)n8,5M5n8,5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for sliding gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570492 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 61 40301011,7540n6,5n6,563,5101060207,7548M5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for swing gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570493 Fig.: Order no.: 570494 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 62 69,5689,54863,569,515,58,56,54079.5689,569,515,58,56,5404863,5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for sliding gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570495 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 63 581040983011,754015063,5n6,525487,7520M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for swing gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570496 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 64 19769,517768,56,5123150M5205463,525 Dimensions Fig.: Order no.: 570497 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 65 19779,565415063,5251771236,58,520M5 570408 CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed Transponder Transponder 570410 Technical details 13 Technical details General Approvals Sensor's mode of operation Coding level in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Design in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Classification in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Pilz coding type Transponder Frequency band Max. transmitter output Electrical data Supply voltage Voltage Kind Voltage tolerance Output of external power supply

(DC) Max. switching frequency Magnet. supply voltage Max. solenoid current t <150 ms Max. cable capacitance at the safety outputs High 4 PDDB fully coded 570408 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570408 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A No-load, PNOZ with relay con-

tacts PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS 40 nF 70 nF Max. inrush current impulse Current pulse, A1 Pulse duration, A1 Max. unit fuse protection in accord-

ance with UL No-load current Inputs Number Voltage at inputs Current at solenoid input Input current range Semiconductor outputs OSSD safety outputs Signal outputs Switching current per output Breaking capacity per output 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 570408 4 24 V DC 500 mA 1,6 - 3 mA 570408 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W High 4 PDDB uniquely coded 570410 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570410 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 570410 4 24 V DC 500 mA 1,6 - 3 mA 570410 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 66 Technical details 570408 No yes 100 A 1 V Semiconductor outputs Potential isolation from system voltage Short circuit-proof Residual current at outputs Voltage drop at OSSDs Conditional rated short circuit cur-

rent Lowest operating current Utilisation category in accordance DC-13 with EN 60947-1 Times 570408 Test pulse duration, safety outputs 450 s Switch-on delay 100 A 1 mA after UB is applied Inputs typ. Inputs max. Actuator typ. Actuator max. Delay-on de-energisation Inputs typ. Inputs max. Actuator typ. Actuator max. 1,1 s 1 ms 3 ms 30 ms 50 ms 3 ms 5 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms Risk time in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Supply interruption before de-ener-

20 ms gisation Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. 20 ms Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Re-

quest Processing time activate/deactivate guard locking Environmental data Temperature of metal surface at ambient temperature: 25 C Ambient temperature 40 C 100 ms 570408 350 - 400 ms In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-14 Temperature range Storage temperature 0 - 60 C In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-1/-2 Temperature range

-25 - 70 C Climatic suitability In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-78 Humidity EMC Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 570410 No yes 100 A 1 V 100 A 1 mA DC-13 570410 450 s 1,1 s 1 ms 3 ms 30 ms 50 ms 3 ms 5 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 20 ms 350 - 400 ms 100 ms 570410 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 60 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 67 Technical details Environmental data Vibration 570408 In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-6 Frequency Amplitude Shock stress 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-27 Number of shocks Acceleration Duration 3 30g 11 ms Airgap creepage Overvoltage category Pollution degree Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Protection type Housing In accordance with UL Mechanical data Length of cable with connector Min. bending radius (fixed perman-

ently) K1 Min. bending radius (moving) K1 Cable diameter K1 Escape release available Mechanical life Holding force FZh III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570408 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,5 mm No 1,000,000 cycles Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator 7.500 N 5.000 N Holding force F1Max in accord-

ance with ISO 14119 Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator Latching force Max. vertical offset Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset around the X axis Max. angular offset around the Y axis Max. angular offset around the Z axis Max. offset in closing direction 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 570410 EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570410 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,5 mm No 1,000,000 cycles 7.500 N 5.000 N 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 68 Technical details Mechanical data Max. retract speed of actuator Actuator 1 Min. distance between safety switches Connection type Cable Material 570408 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 570410 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 0 mm M12, 12-pin male connector LiYY 12 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 0 mm M12, 12-pin male connector LiYY 12 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 6 - 6,5 Nm Max. torque setting for fixing screws Max. torque setting escape release 1,2 - 1,5 Nm Max. torque setting for mounting plate Max. torque setting for mounting bracket Min. gate radius Dimensions 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 22 - 24 Nm Height Width Depth Actuator dimensions Height Width Depth Weight of safety switch Weight of actuator Weight 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g 6 - 6,5 Nm 1,2 - 1,5 Nm 22 - 24 Nm 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g Where standards are undated, the 2015-11 latest editions shall apply. 13.1 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I The following tables describe the classes and specific values of the product interface and the classes of interfaces compatible with it. The classification is described in the ZVEI posi-

tion paper "Classification of Binary 24 V Interfaces - Functional Safety aspects covered by dynamic testing". Inputs Drain Safety switch Source Safety control system C2, C3 C2 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 69 Technical details Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Test impulse interval Min.

-

9 kOhm

-

1 ms Typ.

-

-

-

-

Max. 500 s

-

1 nF

-

Solenoid inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Safe 1-pole HL outputs Source Safety switch Source parameters Test impulse duration Rated current Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

16 Ohm

-

C2 Min.

-

-

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

Drain Evaluation device Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 500 s 1,5 nF C1, C2 Max. 450 s 0,1 A 70 nF 13.2 Safety characteristic data NOTICE You must comply with the safety characteristic data in order to achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine. Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

1-ch. guard locking PL d Cat. 2 SIL CL 2 2,54E-08 20 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 70 Technical details Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

2-ch. guard PL e locking 2-ch. OSSD PL e Cat. 4 Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 SIL CL 3 2,54E-08 1,90E-08 20 20 All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety characteristic data. INFORMATION A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values. NOTICE Be sure that you observe the mechanical life. The safety characteristic data are only valid as long as the values of mechanical life are met. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 71 Supplementary data 14 14.1 Supplementary data Radio approval 14.2 Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit 570492 CE 570492 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 420 g 570493 CE 570493 3000 N 6000 N 420 g 570494 CE 570494 3000 N 6000 N 445 g 14.3 Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit 570495 CE 570495 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 3000 N Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 6000 N 260 g 570496 CE 570496 3000 N 6000 N 600 g 570497 CE 570497 3000 N 6000 N 630 g Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 72 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML Order reference 15 Order reference System 15.1 Product type PSEN ml s 2.1 unit Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, fully coded, for series connection Features PSEN ml s 2.2 unit Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, uniquely coded, for series connection Mechanical safety switch with guard locking, fully coded, for series con-

nection Actuator, fully coded PSEN ml s 2.1 switch PSEN ml 2.1 actu-

ator 12-pin M12 connector Order no. 570 408 12-pin M12 connector 570 410 12-pin M12 connector 570 409 15.2 Accessories Installation accessories Product type PSEN ml escape re-

lease PSEN ml escape re-

lease extension PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 1.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 4.0m PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door Features Escape release stationary Extension escape release stationary 25 mm Escape release with push/pull cable 1.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 2 m Escape release external with push/pull cable 2.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.0 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 4 m Mounting plate for installing the safety switch, with 4 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head locking screw, M5x40 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x16 570 481 Order no. 570 460 570 462 570 470 570 471 570 472 570 473 570 474 570 475 570490 570 492 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 73 Order reference Product type PSEN ml bracket swinging door 70 PSEN ml bracket swinging door 80 PSEN ml door handle sliding door PSEN ml door handle swinging door 70 PSEN ml door handle swinging door 80 PSEN screw set bracket swinging door PSEN screw set bracket sliding door Features Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x16. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a swing gate Order no. 570 493 570 494 570 495 570 496 570 497 570498 Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a sliding gate 570499 Cable Product type PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 3m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 5m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf, 20m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 30m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 0.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1.5m Features 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0.5 m 1 m 1.5 m Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 540 321 540 320 540 319 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight 540 326 540 345 540 346 540 333 540 347 74 Order reference Product type PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 2m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 20m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 30m PSEN cable M12-12sf 2m PSEN cable M12-12sf 3m PSEN cable M12-12sf 5m PSEN cable M12-12sf 10m PSEN cable M12-12sf 20m PSEN cable M12-12sf 30m PSEN cable M12-12sf 50m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 1m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 2m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 3m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 5m Features 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 2 m 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 50 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 5 m 570 351 570 350 540 344 540 343 540 342 540 341 540 340 M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight 570 357 570 358 570 359 570 352 570 353 570 354 570 355 570 356 570 360 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 75 Order reference Product type PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 10m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 20m Features 10 m 20 m Series connection Features Product type PSEN ml Y junction M12 PSEN ml end ad-

apter PSEN ml / PSENcs Y junction M12 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight 570 361 570 362 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 12-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 12-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector 570 486 570 487 570 489 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 76 Appendix 16 Appendix The following check list is intended as a guide to provide support during commissioning, re-

commissioning and the prescribed regular testing of the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2. Note that the check list is not intended to replace the plant-specific safety analysis required for commissioning/recommissioning, nor the resulting inspections and actions. INFORMATION Commissioning, recommissioning and regular inspection may only be car-

ried out by qualified personnel. We recommend that you keep the completed check list and store it with the machine docu-

mentation for reference. Date Action Safety switch Number Actuator Number OK Not OK Notes Signature Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 77 EC declaration of conformity 17 EC declaration of conformity This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-

chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads. Authorised representative: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfildern, Germany Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 78 Front cover y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

8 1 0 2

, 1 0

-

N E

-

0 1 7 4 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnical support is available from Pilz round the clock. AmericasBrazil+55 11 97569-2804Canada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexico+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsiaChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281South Korea+82 31 450 0680Australia+61 3 95600621EuropeAustria+43 1 7986263-0Belgium, Luxembourg+32 9 3217575France+33 3 88104000Germany+49 711 3409-444Ireland+353 21 4804983Italy, Malta+39 0362 1826711Scandinavia+45 74436332Spain+34 938497433Switzerland+41 62 88979-30The Netherlands+31 347 320477Turkey+90 216 5775552United Kingdom+44 1536 462203You can reach our international hotline on: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PAScong, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, THE SPIRIT OF SAFETY are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using ecological materials and energy-saving technologies. Oces and production facilities are ecologically designed, environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz oers sustainability, plus the security of using energy-ecient products and environmentally-friendly solutions.Pilz GmbH & Co. KG Felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostldern, GermanyTel.: +49 711 3409-0 Fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.com200XXXX-EN-0X0-0-2-3-000, 2017-00 Printed in Germany Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2017

 

 

PSEN ml s 2.2

} PSEN sensor technology Operating Manual-1004710-EN-01 Preface This document is the original document. All rights to this documentation are reserved by Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. Copies may be made for the user's internal purposes. Suggestions and comments for improving this documenta-

tion will be gratefully received. Source code from third-party manufacturers or open source software has been used for some components. The relevant licence information is available on the Internet on the Pilz homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. SD means Secure Digital Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 Validity of documentation Using the documentation Definition of symbols Safety 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 Intended use Safety regulations Safety assessment Additional documents that apply Use of qualified personnel Warranty and liability Disposal For your safety Overview 3.1 3.2 Unit features Scope of supply Function description 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 Structure Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) Activation with specification of direction Activation without specification of direction Safety Device Diagnostics Operating modes Block diagram Auxiliary release Recommissioning Prevent restart Escape release Recommissioning Wiring 5.1 5.2 5.3 Important information Pin assignment, connector and cable EMC requirements Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 Important information Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Single connection Series connection Connection to Pilz evaluation devices Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 6 6 6 6 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 15 15 16 16 20 21 22 22 23 24 25 25 25 26 27 27 27 29 30 33 34 3 Contents Section 7 Section 8 Teaching in the actuator 7.1 7.2 PSEN ml 2.1 PSEN ml 2.2 Installation 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 Important information Tapped hole Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Install fixing screws side-on to actuator Centre the bolt in the actuator housing Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 Installation on sliding gate Installation on swing gate Installation with mounting bracket Installation with mounting plate Installing the escape release Important information Installation positions for escape release Installation stationary escape release Installation external escape release Uninstalling the escape release Section 9 Adjustment Section 10 Operation 10.1 10.2 Normal mode Error display Section 11 Checks and maintenance Section 12 Dimensions Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Technical details 13.1 13.2 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I Safety characteristic data Supplementary data 14.1 14.2 14.3 Radio approval Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit Order reference System 15.1 15.2 Accessories Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 35 35 35 36 36 37 39 39 40 40 42 43 45 45 46 46 47 48 50 53 54 55 55 57 58 59 66 69 70 72 72 72 72 73 73 73 4 Contents Section 16 Appendix Section 17 EC declaration of conformity 77 78 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 5 Introduction 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Introduction Validity of documentation This documentation is valid for the product PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 from Version 2.0. This operating manual explains the function and operation, describes the installation and provides guidelines on how to connect the product. Using the documentation This document is intended for instruction. Only install and commission the product if you have read and understood this document. The document should be retained for future ref-

erence. Definition of symbols Information that is particularly important is identified as follows:

DANGER!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that poses an immediate threat of serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. WARNING!

This warning must be heeded! It warns of a hazardous situation that could lead to serious injury and death and indicates preventive measures that can be taken. CAUTION!

This refers to a hazard that can lead to a less serious or minor injury plus material damage, and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. NOTICE This describes a situation in which the product or devices could be dam-

aged and also provides information on preventive measures that can be taken. It also highlights areas within the text that are of particular import-

ance. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 6 Introduction INFORMATION This gives advice on applications and provides information on special fea-

tures. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 7 Safety 2 2.1 Safety Intended use The safety gate system is used for interlocking and guard locking swing gates and sliding gates. The safety gate system can be operated in two ways:

} Unlocking with condition The safety gate system prevents the safety gate from being unlocked while there is any hazard within the danger zone.

} Unlocking without condition The operator can unlock the safety gate system at any time. After starting the unlock-

ing, the guard locking creates a stop command. The time required to unlock the inter-

locking guard has to be longer than the time required to stop the hazardous machine function. The hazardous machine function may only be executed under the following conditions:

} There is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 and

} There is a low signal at safety outputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/Un-

lock Request 2). Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) may only be operated under the following condition:

} Plant is in a safe condition Make sure that this is the case with an AND operation in the safety system immediately before the output is operated. The safety switch meets the requirements in accordance with:

} EN 60947-5-3 with the actuator PSEN ml 2.1: PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Coding level High, type 4 The safety switch may only be used with the corresponding actuator PSEN ml 2.1. The safety level PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 is only achieved if

}

} The solenoid has 2-channel operation via safe, tested outputs, suitable for PL e (Cat. the safety outputs use 2-channel processing 4)/SIL CL 3 applications. With 1-channel operation of the safety inputs S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) and S41 (Lock/

Unlock Request 2) it is only possible to achieve safety level PLd(Cat.2)/SILCL2. Foreseeable misuse

} Safety switches and actuators of the safety gate system PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 must not be used as mechanical limit stops

} Use of the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 under corrosive environmental conditions (cooling emul-

sions, surface treatment, gases, ) Please contact Pilz. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 8 Safety 2.2 2.2.1 Safety regulations Safety assessment Before using a device it is necessary to perform a safety assessment in accordance with the Machinery Directive. Functional safety is guaranteed for the product as a single component. However, this does not guarantee the functional safety of the overall plant/machine. In order to achieve the re-

quired safety level for the overall plant/machine, define the safety requirements for the plant/machine and then define how these must be implemented from a technical and organ-

isational standpoint. 2.2.2 Additional documents that apply 2.2.3 Please read and take note of the following documents. Only for use of the Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD):

} Operating manual for the fieldbus module, for example SDD ES ETH or SDD ES PROFIBUS

} System description "Safety Device Diagnostics"

For the use of passive junctions:

} Operating manual of a passive junction, for example:

PSEN ix2 F4 code PSEN ix2 F8 code PDP67 F 4 code You will need to be conversant with the information in these documents in order to fully un-

derstand this operating manual. Use of qualified personnel The products may only be assembled, installed, programmed, commissioned, operated, maintained and decommissioned by competent persons. A competent person is a qualified and knowledgeable person who, because of their train-

ing, experience and current professional activity, has the specialist knowledge required. To be able to inspect, assess and operate devices, systems and machines, the person has to be informed of the state of the art and the applicable national, European and international laws, directives and standards. It is the companys responsibility only to employ personnel who

} Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety / accident preven-

tion,

} Have read and understood the information provided in the section entitled Safety

} Have a good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the spe-

cific application. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 9 Safety 2.2.4 2.2.5 Warranty and liability All claims to warranty and liability will be rendered invalid if

} The product was used contrary to the purpose for which it is intended,

} Damage can be attributed to not having followed the guidelines in the manual,

} Operating personnel are not suitably qualified,

} Any type of modification has been made (e.g. exchanging components on the PCB boards, soldering work etc.). Disposal

}

In safety-related applications, please comply with the mission time TM in the safety-re-

lated characteristic data.

} When decommissioning, please comply with local regulations regarding the disposal of electronic devices (e.g. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act). 2.3 For your safety WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to substituting an actuator from the interlocking and guard locking system Substituting an actuator for an inappropriate actuator may lead to serious in-

jury and death. You should prevent the interlocking and guard locking system from being manipulated with an inappropriate actuator. Keep the substitute actuator in a safe place and protect it from unau-

thorised access. If substitute actuators are used, these must be installed as described under Installation [

36]

If the original actuators are replaced with substitute actuators, the ori-

ginal actuators must be destroyed before disposal.

} Do not remove the connector's protective cap until you are just about to connect the unit. This will prevent potential contamination. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 10 Overview 3 3.1 Overview Unit features

} Safe guard locking for swing gates and sliding gates

} Safe interlocking (position monitoring)

} Transponder technology

}

}

} Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD) 2 safety inputs for series connection of multiple safety switches 2 safety outputs Safety Device Diagnostics can be used to poll sensor information, to perform ac-

tions and to read configuration parameters Manipulation protection in accordance with ISO 14119 (chap. 7.2.d) is possible by verifying the short name of the actuator through the controller via SDD communica-

tion

} Diagnostic input for Y1 for Safety Device Diagnostics (SDD)

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 for Safety Device Diagnostics

} Monitoring of shorts between the safety outputs

} Guard locking element keeps the safety gate from being opened unintentionally

} Auxiliary release for opening the safety gate

}

} Suitable for left and right hinged safety gates

} Pilz type of coding: Fully coded/uniquely coded

} M12, 12-pin male connector

}

1 signal output LEDs:

Supply voltage/fault Status of actuator Status of guard locking Status of safety inputs S11 and S21

} The bolt in the actuator can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing before the actuator is installed. As a result, the actuator can be installed vertically or horizontally.

} The safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 can be expanded using a stationary or external escape release (see Order reference: Accessories [

The stationary escape release can be expanded by 25 mm max. two times. The external escape releases are available with push/pull cables between 1.5and4m in length (grading 50cm). 73]). 3.2 Scope of supply

} Scope of supply PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 Safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 11 Function description 4 4.1 Function description Structure The interlocking and guard locking system prevents the safety gates to the danger zone from being opened while there is any hazard within the danger zone (machine movement, voltage, ...). The safety outputs may have a high or low signal, depending on the position of the actuator and the signal path of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). Gate closed Gate open Safety outputs 12 and 22 Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

} Actuator is detected and

} Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) and

} There is a high signal at the inputs S11 and S21 If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Feasibility monitoring for safety inputs S11 and S21

}

If one safety input switches from high to low, while the other safety input remains high, an unequal status is displayed: Input LED flashes yellow If this safety input switches back from low to high, while the other safety input remains high, a feasibility error is displayed and a partial operation lock is triggered: Input LED flashes yellow

}

A switch to a high signal will only lead to normal switch operation if both inputs had a low signal. From this moment on, the switch to high may occur (partial operation lock see Error display [

57]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 12 Safety switchActuatorSafety switchActuator Function description

} Diagnostic input Y1 If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is automatically activ-

ated and data is read. If no fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the diagnostic input Y1 is not used.

} Signal output/diagnostic output Y32 The status of the actuator is output. If a fieldbus module of the SDD is used, the signal output/diagnostic output for the writing of data is activated. 4.2 Activation of safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation)

}

If there is a low signal at safety inputs S31 and S41, the guard locking pin does not change its position.

} Guard locking may only be deactivated once the hazardous movement has been com-

pleted. Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics

} The safety inputs S31 and S41 have a high signal within max. 500 ms after the receipt of the guard locking activation. Single connection Guard locking is activated through a high signal (length 350 - 400 ms ) at inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation). After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse (length 350 - 400 ms ) at these inputs deactivates guard locking. Series connection In a series connection with n safety switches the safety lock is activated by a high signal with a minimum length of t=n*(350 - 400 ms) at the inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid opera-

tion). Number of safety switches in the series connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Request in ms 350 700 1050 1400 1750 2100 After activation, the inputs must be low. Another pulse of the specified length at these in-

puts deactivates guard locking. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 13 Function description Legend

[1] PSEN ml Y junction M12

[2] PSEN ml end adapter

} Series connection of the OSSD outputs

} Series connection of diagnostics with Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 14 3 x PSEN ml sX1X2X3X1X2X3X1X2Safety control system8-core12-core[1][2]S21S111222S21S1112221. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlY1Y32Y1Y321. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlFieldbus module Function description

} Series connection of the solenoid operation 4.2.1 Activation with specification of direction

} The guard locking is activated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S31 before S41).

} The guard locking is deactivated when the time between the rising edges from S31 to S41 is between 40ms and 500ms (S41 before S31). Legend tmax Maximum time between the rising edges from S31 and S42 4.2.2 Activation without specification of direction

} The guard locking changes its state when the time between the rising edges from S31 and S41<20ms. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 15 S31S413242S31S4132421. PSEN ml2. PSEN mlS31S41tmaxGuard lockingS31S41tmaxGuard locking Function description 4.3 Safety Device Diagnostics Safety Device Diagnostics is an option that can be selected independently of the safety-re-

lated wiring. When using the Safety Device Diagnostics, up to 16 sensors connected in series can be connected as a subscriber to a fieldbus module. The communication of the sensors with the fieldbus module is automatically built up again with each new supply of the supply voltage. As a result, a sensor can be exchanged, e.g. when servicing, without the need for special measures. An exchange can be detected via the fieldbus module e.g. through the serial number.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module:

Poll information of the sensors (examples: what sensor in the series has switched, at what point could there be an open circuit in the series connection) Read configuration parameters of the sensor (examples: Number of teach-in pro-

cesses remaining, serial number of the switch) Perform actions (example: poll updated actuator name) Selectively activate or deactivate guard locking of individual PSEN ml within a series connection The results of the sensor diagnostics can be checked already during the installation phase via the display in the fieldbus module, without the need to connect the fieldbus module to the network.

} With Safety Device Diagnostics there are the following diagnostic options for the field-

bus module for simple wiring:

Information is passed on via the fieldbus module directly to the network Mappings of the signal outputs to the sensor are automated by the SDD. This prevents wiring errors and an expansion or reduction of the sensors is possible without the need to change existing wiring. Wiring in accordance with IP20: Rapid installation in the control cabined is enabled. Wiring in accordance with IP67: Various passive junctions can be used (see Order references for accessories [

cable from the field in the control cabinet. 73]) to connect several sensors with only one Further information on Safety Device Diagnostics can be found in Additional documents that apply [

9]. 4.4 Operating modes The safety switch can be used in various operating modes.

} Operation without safety device diagnostics Standard operating mode After every restart the safety switch is in operation without Safety Device Dia-

gnostics. No communication with Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 16 Function description Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Safety switch supplies diagnostic data to Safety Device Diagnostics Activating/deactivating the guard locking is only via the signals S31 and S41

} Operation with active use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Activate/deactivate the guard locking by a combination of a Safety Device Dia-

gnostics command and the status of the safety inputs S31 and S41 (S31 and S41 must have a high signal). The safety requirements are guaranteed by the signals S31 and S41 (the fieldbus for Safety Device Diagnostics communication is not safe).

} Operation with specification of direction when activating/deactivating he guard locking A specification of direction can be used to control the change of the guard locking status. Toggling: The safety switch changes with each simultaneous controlling of S31 and S41 the guard locking status (activated <-> deactivated). Force Direction: The safety switch is selectively activated or deactivated by offset activation of the rising edges of S31 and S41. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 17 Function description Timing diagrams Fig.: Passive use of the Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] The door connected upstream in the series connection is closed

[3] The door connected upstream in the series connection is locked

[4] Gate is closed

[5] Guard locking is activated by the programmable safety system

[6] Guard locking is activated

[7] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[8] Outputs will be deactivated

[9] Guard locking will be deactivated

[10] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 18

[1][4][5][8][9][7][t1][t1][t2][t2][2][3]32 + 42[10]Guard lockingActuator Function description Fig.: Active use of Safety Device Diagnostics Legend

[1] Gate is open

[2] The door connected upstream in the series connection is closed

[3] The door connected upstream in the series connection is locked

[4] Gate is closed

[5] Guard locking is activated by the programmable safety system

[6] Guard locking is activated

[7] Execution of the hazardous machine function is permitted

[8] Outputs will be deactivated

[9] Guard locking will be deactivated

[10] Gate is open

[t1] Processing time of guard locking signal = 100 ms

[t2] Time window for changing guard locking status Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 19

[7][1][4][5][8][9][t1][t1][t2][t2][2][3]32 + 42[10]SDD command guard lockingGuard lockingActuator Function description 4.5 Block diagram Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 20 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLockPowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1S11S213242&&&&Function description 4.6 Auxiliary release The auxiliary release enables guard locking to be opened from the access side to the danger zone. The safety switch has auxiliary releases on three sides. INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Op-

eration) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Legend

[1] Auxiliary release screw Torx T10

[2] Security screw Torx T10, sealed with varnish when delivered Mode of operation:

1. Remove the security screw [2] using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] half a turn anti-clockwise using a Torx T10 screw-

driver. The guard locking pin is displaced and the bolt is released. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 21

[1][2]Function description The safety gate to the danger zone can be opened. 4.6.1 Recommissioning Recommission PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1. Rotate the auxiliary release screw [1] (see Figure [

Torx T10 screwdriver. 21]) half a turn clockwise using a 2. Re-insert the security screw [2] (see Figure [

3. Seal the security screw with varnish. 4. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 5. Carry out a function test on the safety switch and actuator. The safety function may only 21]) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. be checked by qualified personnel. INFORMATION If the auxiliary release screw is not turned back correctly after use, the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 switches to a fault condition. 4.7 Prevent restart To prevent the machine restarting (unintentionally) while there is someone inside the danger zone, a padlock can be attached via the through hole on the actuator (see diagram). As a result the actuator cannot engage with the safety switch, guard locking is not activated and the machine is prevented from starting. Legend

[1] Through hole on the actuator for attaching a padlock

[2] Padlock

[3] Actuator If the actuator is to blocked using several locks in parallel, a multiple lock can be used (e.g. Brady Lockout device, article no.852439). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 22

[1][2][3]Function description 4.8 Escape release Distinction between escape release and emergency release

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from outside the hazardous area.

} The emergency release enables the manual release of the guard locking without aids from within the hazardous area and it corresponds to an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed within the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. If the escape release accessory (stationary or external) is installed outside the hazardous area, the accessory can be used as an escape release in accordance with ENISO14119. Legend

[1] Escape release stationary

[2] Escape release externally

[3] Tension pressure cables in lengths of 1.50m to 4m

[4] Button of the escape release pin

[5] Escape release pin INFORMATION If guard locking is deactivated using the auxiliary release, there is a low sig-

nal at safety outputs 12 and 22. An error code will be issued (see under Op-

eration) and the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 23

[1][2][3][4][5]Function description Mode of operation If in the hazardous area the button of the escape release pin [4] is pressed towards the safety gate, the escape release impacts directly on the auxiliary release of the safety switch and the auxiliary release unlocks the safety gate. The safety gate can be opened immedi-

ately, enabling the operator to leave the danger zone. There is a low signal at safety outputs 12 and 22 if the escape release was operated. Scope

} Scope of supply stationary escape release 1 escape release stationary 1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk

} Scope of supply external escape release 73]) 1 escape release external with installed push/pull cables (see Order reference:

Accessories [

1 adapter disk 2 screws for adapter disk 4 screws for installation on the adapter disk 4.8.1 Recommissioning 1. Pull back the button of the escape release pin. 2. Switch the voltage off and then on again. 3. Carry out a function test using the escape release. The safety function may only be checked by qualified personnel. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 24 Wiring 5 5.1 5.2 Wiring Important information

} Hand-tighten the connector.

}

Information given in the Technical details [

66] must be followed. Pin assignment, connector and cable 12-pin M12 male connector PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Function

+24 V UB 0 V UB Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 2) Safety output channel 1 Operation of solenoid to open and close guard lock-

ing (channel 1) Safety output channel 2 Safety input channel 1 Signal output/diagnostic output Diagnostics input Safety input channel 2 Operation of solenoid of the next safety switch in the series connection (channel 1) Operation of solenoid of the next safety switch in the series connection (channel 2) Terminal designation A1 A2 S41 Cable colour (Pilz cable) Brown Blue White 12 S31 22 S11 Y32 Y1 S21 32 42 Green Pink Yellow Black Grey Red Purple Grey-pink Red-blue Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 25 Wiring 5.3 NOTICE The colour marking for the connection lead only applies for the cable that Pilz supplies as an accessory EMC requirements

} Ensure the wiring and EMC requirements of EN 60204-1 are met.

} UL requirement: The supply voltage to the safety switch must be protected with a quick-

acting fuse (see Technical details [

66]).

} The inputs and outputs of the safety switch must have a protective separation to voltages over 60 V AC.

} The power supply must meet the regulations for extra low voltages with protective sep-

aration (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN60204-1. INFORMATION Only use safety relays with a 24 VDC supply voltage. Safety relays with a wide-range power supply or in AC device versions have internal potential isolation and are not suitable as evaluation devices. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 26 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6 6.1 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Important information Make sure that the selected evaluation device has the following properties:

}

2-channel with feasibility monitoring Both OSSDs must change switch state synchronously. In particular, the evaluation device must monitor that the state of both OSSDs was "Gate unlocked" before both re-

turn to the "Gate locked" state and vice-versa.

} OSSD signals are evaluated through 2 channels

} The state of the OSSDs must be tested before and after safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated (solenoid operation) (see Timing diagram [

18]) WARNING!

Potential loss of safety function due to failure to test for a safe condition Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. Use an evaluation device/safety system to test whether the plant is in a safe condition. Do not operate the solenoid of the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 via S31/S41 unless the plant is in a safe condition.

} The use of Safety Device Diagnostics is described in the System Description "Safety Device Diagnostics". 6.2 Minimum requirements for activation of guard locking Use in PL e (Cat. 4) applications

} Safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) have 2-channel operation via safe out-

puts, which are suitable for PL e (Cat. 4) applications 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Monitoring of shorts across signal cables through activation of guard locking Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 27 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 3) applications

}

2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) via relay out-

puts 2-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), each with 0.5A 2-channel processing of safety outputs

}

}

} Exclusion of shorts across signal cables through appropriate measures (e.g. protected cable layout, see EN ISO 13849-2) Legend

[1] Protected cable layout Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 28 PSEN mlActuatorA1A222Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensor24 V0 VLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 1S11S21Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuator22Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensorLock/Unlock Request 2Lock/Unlock Request 124 V[1]A1A224 V0 VS11S21Programmable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Use in PL d (Cat. 2) applications

}

}

}

1-channel operation for safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation) 2-channel processing of safety outputs 1-channel operation for interconnected safety inputs S31 and S41 (solenoid operation), with 1A 6.3 Single connection Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 29 Programmable safety systemActivation of guard lockingPSEN mlActuator22Y32S31S4112PSEN mlSensorLock/Unlock RequestA1A224 V0 VS11S2124 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1S11S21ActuatorSafety switchProgrammable safety systemActivation of guard locking Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.4 Series connection CAUTION!

Extension of delay-on de-energisation When several (n) devices are connected in series, the delay-on de-ener-

gisation time adds with the number of interconnected safety switches. The max. delay-on de-energisation is made up of the risk time (see Technical details [

+ (n-1) x max. delay-on de-energisation of the inputs

+ max. delay-on de-energisation of the evaluation device 66]) The safety switches PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 are suitable for series connection with max. 16 safety switches. In practice, the maximum possible number will be limited by the following parameters, among others:

} The required SIL level (e.g. SIL CL 3),

}

}

} Cable length (see notes on cable lengths),

} Height of supply voltage. Ensure there is sufficient supply voltage, taking inrush currents and fusing into considera-

tion. the required performance level (e.g. PL e (Cat. 4)), the maximum delay or risk time permitted by the application, Notes on cable lengths

} Determine the values under the following conditions:

Room temperature (25C), conductor cross section 0.25mm2, output load per output

(12,22,Y32) each 10mA Legend

[1] Safety control system

[2] Safety switch PSEN ml Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 30

[1]L1[2][2][2]L2L3L4L5L6[2][2][2]Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Examples for cable lengths

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 20.4 V L4 L3 L2 Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 24 V L1 50 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 10 m 5 m 20 m 10 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 10 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m 5 m L4 L3 L2 Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6

} Operating voltage at the safety control system 28.8 V L1 120 m 60 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 20 m 60 m 50 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m L5 L6 5 m 5 m 5 m L5 L6 10 m 20 m 20 m Number of safety switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 L2 L1 180 m 130 m 50 m 80 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m L3 L4 L5 L6 50 m 50 m 30 m 20 m 30 m 30 m 20 m 20 m 20 m 20 m Overall length 50 m 50 m 40 m 35 m 30 m 30 m Overall length 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m 120 m Overall length 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m 180 m Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 31 Connection to control systems and evaluation devices For connecting the safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 in a series connection there are the fol-

lowing options:

} Wiring with the safety control system via PSEN ml Y junction Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 32 24 V0 VA1A21222S21S11FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32423212221222A1A2A1A2RxTxS21S11I2I1S21S113242S31S414232S31S41O2O1Y1Y32Y1Y32Y1ActuatorSafety switchFieldbus moduleSafety control systemSafety switchSafety switchActuatorActuator Connection to control systems and evaluation devices 6.5 Legend

[1] PSEN ml Y junction M12

[2] PSEN ml end adapter

} When establishing the series connections with connection to the safety control system, use the following adapters:

PSEN ml Y junction M12 PSEN ml end adapter

} Connection in the control cabinet at the terminal block Connect the 12-core cables of the safety switch to the terminal block of the control cabinet. Connection to Pilz evaluation devices The safety switch PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 can be connected to Pilz evaluation devices, for ex-

ample. Suitable Pilz evaluation devices are, for example:

} PNOZmulti for safety gate monitoring Configure the switch in the PNOZmulti Configurator with switch type 3.

} PSS for safety gate monitoring with standard function block SB064, SB066 or FS_SafetyGate

} PSSuniversal PLC for safety gate monitoring with function block FS_SafetyGate The correct connection to the respective evaluation device is described in the operating manual for the evaluation device. Make sure that the connection is made in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual for the selected evaluation device. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 33 3 x PSEN ml sX1X2X3X1X2X3X1X2Safety control system8-core12-core[1][2]Connection to control systems and evaluation devices Connection to PNOZmulti is illustrated by way of example. 6.5.1 Connection example with PNOZmulti and Safety Device Diagnostics Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 34 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSEN ml0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)Rx16S11S21Tx32421112Activation of guard locking via SDD ES modulefollowing PSEN ml Teaching in the actuator 7 7.1 Teaching in the actuator PSEN ml 2.1 Teaching in the actuator for the first time:

The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 66]) is To teach in a new actuator:

} A maximum of 8 learning procedures are possible. 1. The actuator that is to be taught in must be brought into the safety switch's response range as the only transponder. As soon as the actuator is detected, the "Safety Gate"

LED will flash yellow. 2. After 20 s has elapsed, the "Safety Gate" LED turns to quick yellow flashes. Trigger a system reset in the next 120 s by interrupting the power supply. 3. When the supply voltage is switched back on, the learning procedure is complete and the number of permitted additional learning procedures is reduced by 1. NOTICE The actuator must not be removed during the learning procedure. This actuator cannot be retaught on the same safety switch. 7.2 PSEN ml 2.2 The first actuator to be detected by the safety switch (see Technical details [

taught in automatically as soon as it is brought into the response range. 66]) is NOTICE No other actuator may be taught in once this actuator has been taught. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 35 Installation 8 8.1 Installation Important information INFORMATION Refer to the guidelines for designing guards and integrating interlocks with guard locking in ENISO14120. NOTICE Install the safety switch and actuator so that the possibilities of defeat are reduced to a minimum (see guidelines for reducing the possibilities for de-

feating interlocking devices in EN ISO 14119). NOTICE Install safety switch and actuator so that it is not possible to reach through with hand or finger.

} The safety switch and actuator should be installed opposite each other in parallel.

} Make sure that the actuator makes complete contact with the mounting surface.

} Make sure that the at least one of the auxiliary release/escape releases can be oper-

ated after installation.

} For a minimum screw depth of 6 mm, M5 screws with resistance class 8.8 should be used to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

66].

} Use non-removable flat head locking screws to attach the safety switch and actuator

(e.g. cheese-head or pan head screws) or rivets.

} Use the same type of screw to attach the safety switch and actuator.

} Prevent self-loosening of the fastening elements on the safety switch and actuator, On the safety switch: through torque (see Technical details [

On the actuator: through torque (see Technical details [

66]) 66]) and bonded screw retention

} Make sure that the actuator does not present a risk.

} The mounting surfaces for safety switches and actuators can have a max. unevenness of 0.5 mm.

} Prevent the safety switch and actuator being exposed to heavy shock or vibration.

} The fastening of safety switch and actuator has to be sufficiently stable to ensure the proper operation of the safety switch and the actuator. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 36 Installation 8.2 Tapped hole

} To fix the safety switch at the three possible mounting positions, there are 3 drill holes on 3 sides. As a result, the safety switch can be installed on the frames of left and right hinged slid-

ing gates and swing gates. If necessary use a Mounting plate [

bracket [

Different holding forces arise, based on the installation. Fixing screws in parallel to actuator [

45] (see Order reference: Accessories [

45] or Mounting 73]). 39]:

Holding forceFZh=7.500 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=15.000 N Fixing screws side-on to actuator [

39]:

Holding forceFZh=5.000 N, Holding forceF1maxin accordance withENISO14119=10.000 N INFORMATION Please note that the stated holding forces only apply when installed without a mounting bracket. The holding forces when installed with a mounting bracket can be found in the table "Technical details for mounting bracket [

72]". The tapped holes must have a depth of at least 6 mm. Installation of safety switch Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, no mounting plate Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actuator, with mounting plate Tapped hole Tapped holes for four M5 screws on the mounting surface. Tapped holes for two M8 screws on the mounting surface, for attaching the mount-

ing plate. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 37 Installation Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, no mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Fixing screws in parallel/side-on to actu-

ator, with mounting plate Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes as indicated. Actuator, no mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M5 screws (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 38 3119,2193,54,5 8,5 5,35 1048 Installation Actuator, with mounting bracket Provide the mounting surface with tapped holes for two M6 screws (see Dimensions).

(Diagram: order no. 570 492 as example) 8.3 Install fixing screws in parallel to actuator Use four M5 screws to attach the switch to the mounting surface.

} Torque setting: Please note the information provided under Technical details [

66]. Fig.: Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator Legend

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to actuator 8.4 Install fixing screws side-on to actuator

[1] Front of safety switch

[2] Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 39 6,5XY[3][3][1][2][1][2]Installation Use four screws [1] to fix the safety switch to the mount-

ing surface. Fully tighten the four screws

[1] on the safety switch. Torque setting: Please note the information provided un-

der Technical details [

66]. 8.5 Centre the bolt in the actuator housing The bolt must be centred in the actuator housing in order to maintain the distances on set-

tling gates. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing (see diagram). Bolt centred within the actuator hous-

ing Bolt not centred within the actuator housing 8.6 Rotate the bolt in the actuator housing 90 The actuator can be installed vertically on a gate (see Figure [

ator horizontally, the bolt can be rotated 90 in the actuator housing prior to installation. 1. On the housing skin [3] in the actuator housing, press down the spring plate [1] on both 12]). To install the actu-

sides of the bolt and keep the plate held down. 2. Rotate the bolt in the housing skin by 90 in the required direction ([2]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 40

[1][1][1][1]Installation Legend

[1] Spring plate in the housing skin

[2] Bolt, can be rotated 90

[3] Housing skin 3. Centre the bolt in the actuator housing [

40]. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 41

[1][2][3]Installation 8.7 Installation on sliding gate Legend

[1] Safety switch, installed on gate frame

[2] Actuator with mounting bracket (available as Accessory [

sliding gate 73]), installed on 1. Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

39] or side-on to actuator [

39] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 42

[1][2]Installation 8.8 Installation on swing gate Fig.: Swing gate with internal and external hinge Legend

[1]

[2]

1. Safety switch on gate frame Actuator, installed on swing gate Install the safety switch with the fixing screws of the safety switch in parallel to the actuator [

39] or side-on to actuator [

39] on the gate frame. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the gate. The actuator should engage smoothly into the safety switch. Install the safety switch horizontally at a swing gate Please note:

Depending on the installation boundary conditions, a larger gate radius may be required

(see diagram). Please contact Pilz when smaller gate radiuses are required. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 43

[1][2][2]Installation Make sure that a slight shift of the rotation point of the door is maintained when installing the actuator. Legend R The distance of the upper part of the safety switch from the rotation point of the door X Parallel shift of the actuator Tilt angle when installing the actuator

} Tilt the actuator during installation by 10 in the following situations:

50 mm < X < 75 mm and R < 600 mm X < 50 mm and R < 500 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 44 Installation 8.9 Installation with mounting bracket 1. Use two M6 screws to fix the mounting bracket to the gate. The position of the drill holes can be taken from the section entitled Dimensions. 2. Use two M5 screws to fix the actuator to the mounting bracket. Fig.: Actuator, installed on mounting bracket 8.10 Installation with mounting plate 1. Attach the mounting plate to the swing gate/sliding gate. 2. Use four M5 screws to fix the safety switch [

39] to the mounting plate. Fig.: Safety switch, installed on mounting plate Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 45 Installation 8.11 Installing the escape release 8.11.1 Important information WARNING!

Loss of safety function due to the incorrect installation of the escape re-

lease!

If the button of the escape release pin is accessible from the outside, the guard locking device can be released from the outside and the safety gates opened, although the hazardous machine is switched on. Depending on the application, serious injury or death may result. The escape release should be installed so that it is only accessible from in-

side the danger zone.

} The button of the escape release pin must be impossible to reach from a position out-

side the protected area.

} Make sure that the escape release cannot be operated unintentionally.

} Prevent the effect of transverse forces on the escape release.

} Secure the screw joints with a with a threadlocker.

} Ensure that the button of the escape release pin is clearly visible and that is it not covered.

} Make sure that the min. bending radius of the push/pull cable of60mm is maintained when using the external escape release.

} Make sure that the button of the escape release pin does not present a risk.

} The mounting surface has to completely cover the bottom of the escape release hous-

ing. The bottom of the escape release housing must not be accessible after installation. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 46 Installation 8.11.2 Installation positions for escape release The stationary escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in three dif-

ferent directions each. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 47

[1][2]Installation The external escape release can be installed on the three auxiliary releases in four different directions each. The push/pull cable can be led out on different sides. Legend

[1]

[2]

Installation options at the sides Installation options at the back 8.11.3 Installation stationary escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 48

[1][2]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The button of the escape release pin can be removed for the installation (e.g. when the escape release pin is to be run through a wall). The button of the escape release pin must be secured again with a threadlocker and hand-tightened after escape release in-

stallation is complete

} To bridge larger distances the escape release pin can be extended by a max. of 25mm two times (see Order reference: Accessories [

73]). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 49

[1][2][3]Installation Legend

[1] Button of the escape release pin

[2] Escape release pin 8.11.4 Installation external escape release 1. Remove the security screw [1] using a Torx T10 screwdriver T10. 2. Screw the adapter disk of the escape release with the two hexagon sockets M3x8[3]

on the safety switch with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Make sure that the pin of the ad-

apter disk [2] is at the place where the security screw of the auxiliary release [1] used to be. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 50

[2][1]Installation Legend

[1] Security screw of the auxiliary release

[2] Pin in the adapter disk

[3] Hexagon sockets M3x8 3. Screw the escape release with the 4 raised head screws M3x12 to the adapter disk with 1,2 - 1,5 Nm (see diagram). Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 51

[1][2][3]Installation 4. Screw the housing of the escape release with the screws [1] to a mounting surface with 6 - 6,5 Nm (see diagram).

} The screws of the push/pull cable [2] can be loosened to make installation easier (e.g. when the push/pull cable is to be run through a wall). The screws must be fixed with 6 -

6,5 Nm after the escape release is installed. Legend

[1] Screwing the escape release to the mounting area

[2] Screwing the cable Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 52

[1][1][2]Installation 8.11.5 Uninstalling the escape release If the push/pull cable is to be run through a conduit pipe, the cable has to be uninstalled at the escape release first. Prerequisites

} The conduit pipe must have a diameter of at least 12mm. Procedure:

1. Lift off the cover [1] (e.g. with a screwdriver with a flat blade). Legend

[1] Cover

[2] Nut M10 x 0,75

[3] Fork head

[4] Slot nut 2. Loosen the nut [2]. 3. Pull out the push/pull cable with the slot nut [4] and remove the slot nut and the nut [2]

from the cable. 4. Run the cable through the conduit pipe. 5. Push the nut [2] and the slot nut [4] over the fork head [3] back on the cable. 6. Push the cable with the fork head [3] on the fork in the escape release. The slot nut [4]

must be fitted into the nut again. 7. Tighten the nut [2] with 6 - 6,5 Nm. 8. Put the lid [1] back on. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 53

[1][2][4][3]Adjustment 9 Adjustment Please note:

} Safety switch and actuator must be aligned correctly

} Distances are maintained as stated in the following diagram

} Actuator is centred (see Centre bolt in actuator housing [

} Always test the function with a connected evaluation device.

} When installing an external or stationary escape release, check the function of the es-

40]) cape release with a connected evaluation device. View from above View from the side Perspective view

[1] Safety switch

[2] Actuator

[3] Max. lateral offset

+/-3,0 mm

[4] Max. vertical offset

+/-3,0 mm

[5] Max. angular offset around the X axis +/-2,0 deg

[6] Max. angular offset around the Y axis +/-2,5 deg

[7] Max. angular offset around the Z axis +/-7,5 deg

[8] Max. offset in closing direction

+/-2 mm Attach safety switch and actuator Once the safety switch and actuator are correctly aligned, the actuator's screw connection must be tightened. 1. Tighten up one M5 screw. 2. For applications with increased safety requirements (e.g. SIL CL 2 PL d), swap the second M5 screw for an M5 locking screw. 3. Tighten up the M5 screw or M5 locking screw. Please note the max. torque setting stated in the Technical details [

66]. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 54

[7][3][1][2][6][8][4][2][1][5][2][1]Operation 10 Operation NOTICE The safety function should be checked after initial commissioning and each time the plant/machine is changed. The safety functions may only be checked by qualified personnel. Status indicators:

}

}

}

}

"Device" LED illuminates green: The unit is ready for operation

"Safety Gate" LED lights up yellow: Actuator is within the response range

"Lock" LED lights up green: Guard locking active

"Input" LED lights independently of the status of safety inputs S11 and S21 Legend:

LED off LED on LED flashes (500 ms on, 500 ms off) LED flashes quickly (50 ms on, 950 ms off) LED flashes very quickly (25 ms on, 475 ms off) 10.1 Normal mode LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 is started Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Green Green Green Yellow Yel-

low Yel-

low Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are low Safety gate open, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are high Safety gate closed, actuator not de-

tected, guard locking deactivated, safety inputs S11 and S21 are high Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 55 Operation LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detec-

ted, guard locking activated Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Warnings LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Green Yellow Green Yel-

low Display not defin-

itive Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Switch status Safety gate closed, actuator detected, guard locking cannot be activated / deac-

tivated The supply voltage to safety inputs S31 and S41 was switched back on before the auxili-

ary release screw was turned back. Safety switch active despite over or under-

voltage Green Red Display not defin-

itive Display not defin-

itive Yel-

low Yel-

low Display not definitive Green Partial operation:

One input is low, after both inputs were high Partial operation lock:

One input is low, after both inputs were high Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 Remedy / meas-

ure Check the actu-

ator's alignment [

to the safety switch. 54]

Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on (see Recommissionin g [

22]). Check the supply voltage. If safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated or de-

activated while an undervoltage warning is present, the safety switch switches to a fault condition. Open both inputs

(switch to normal operation). Open both in-

puts. This will cancel the lock. 56 Operation LED status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Display not defin-

itive Red Green Yel-

low Switch status Partial operation lock:

Both inputs are high Remedy / meas-

ure 10.2 Error display LED status Switch status Remedy / measure Device Safety Gate Input Lock Red Yellow Display not definitive Safety switch de-

activated due to under or over-

voltage Yel-

low Check the supply voltage and switch the supply voltage off and then on again. Previous LED display is retained Display not definitive Safety outputs in fault condition Auxiliary release/

escape release activated Display not definitive Error Safety switch does not start Check the wiring and switch the supply voltage off and then on again.

} Auxiliary release: Turn back the auxiliary release screw and then switch the supply voltage on

(see Recommissioning [

22]).

} Escape release: Pull the button of the escape release pin back again and then switch on the voltage supply again (see Re-

commissioning under escape release [

24]). Please contact Pilz. Change the safety switch. Red Red Red Green Yellow Display not definitive Yel-

low Wrong actuator Use the actuator PSEN ml 2.1. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 57 Checks and maintenance 11 Checks and maintenance Regular inspection of the switch function is required to guarantee the trouble-free, long-

term function. If the interlock and guard locking system is only used rarely (opening and closing the safety gate and activating/deactivating the guard locking device), a manual function test is re-

quired. The correct function of the device should be checked at regular intervals and after each er-

ror. Test intervals in accordance with EN ISO 14119:

}

}

for SIL CL 3/PL e at least 1x per month for SIL CL 2/PL d at least 1x per year The Appendix contains a Check list [

77], which should help you perform the test. Visual inspection:

} Check that the seal on the security screw on the auxiliary release is intact. If the seal is not intact, make sure that the security screw is inserted and use varnish to seal the se-

curity screw.

} Check the safety switch and actuator for damage.

} Make sure that the safety switch and actuator are firmly secured.

} Check the offset of the safety switch and actuator. Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset Max. vertical offset

} Check that the wiring is correct.

} Remove any dirt from the safety switch and actuator. Function test

} The actuator is detected and at the safety outputs 12 and 22 there is a high signal after detection of the actuator.

} The guard locking device can be activated/deactivated when the safety inputs S31 and S41 are activated.

} Under these conditions there is a high signal at safety outputs 12 and 22:

Actuator is detected and Guard locking pin has successfully been activated (guard locking pin is in the locked position) and There is a high signal at the inputs S11 and S21 If one of these conditions is not met, the signal at the safety outputs will be low. Escape release

} Test whether the button of the escape release pin can be detected and reached.

} Check the function of the escape release. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 58 Dimensions 12 Dimensions Safety switch Distance between safety switch mounting surface and actuator mounting surface Actuator Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 59 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,52953674069,5 Dimensions Mounting plate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570490 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 60 25512,543,25193,5204,531280(12,5)n8,5M5n8,5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for sliding gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570492 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 61 40301011,7540n6,5n6,563,5101060207,7548M5M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket for swing gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570493 Fig.: Order no.: 570494 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 62 69,5689,54863,569,515,58,56,54079.5689,569,515,58,56,5404863,5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for sliding gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570495 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 63 581040983011,754015063,5n6,525487,7520M5 Dimensions Mounting bracket with handle unit for swing gate (see Accessories [

73]) Fig.: Order no.: 570496 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 64 19769,517768,56,5123150M5205463,525 Dimensions Fig.: Order no.: 570497 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 65 19779,565415063,5251771236,58,520M5 570408 CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed CE, FCC, IC, TV, cULus Listed Transponder Transponder 570410 Technical details 13 Technical details General Approvals Sensor's mode of operation Coding level in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Design in accordance with EN ISO 14119 Classification in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Pilz coding type Transponder Frequency band Max. transmitter output Electrical data Supply voltage Voltage Kind Voltage tolerance Output of external power supply

(DC) Max. switching frequency Magnet. supply voltage Max. solenoid current t <150 ms Max. cable capacitance at the safety outputs High 4 PDDB fully coded 570408 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570408 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A No-load, PNOZ with relay con-

tacts PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS 40 nF 70 nF Max. inrush current impulse Current pulse, A1 Pulse duration, A1 Max. unit fuse protection in accord-

ance with UL No-load current Inputs Number Voltage at inputs Current at solenoid input Input current range Semiconductor outputs OSSD safety outputs Signal outputs Switching current per output Breaking capacity per output 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 570408 4 24 V DC 500 mA 1,6 - 3 mA 570408 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W High 4 PDDB uniquely coded 570410 122 kHz - 128 kHz 15 mW 570410 24 V DC

-20 %/+20 %

1 W 1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 40 mA 570410 4 24 V DC 500 mA 1,6 - 3 mA 570410 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 66 Technical details 570408 No yes 100 A 1 V Semiconductor outputs Potential isolation from system voltage Short circuit-proof Residual current at outputs Voltage drop at OSSDs Conditional rated short circuit cur-

rent Lowest operating current Utilisation category in accordance DC-13 with EN 60947-1 Times 570408 Test pulse duration, safety outputs 450 s Switch-on delay 100 A 1 mA after UB is applied Inputs typ. Inputs max. Actuator typ. Actuator max. Delay-on de-energisation Inputs typ. Inputs max. Actuator typ. Actuator max. 1,1 s 1 ms 3 ms 30 ms 50 ms 3 ms 5 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms Risk time in accordance with EN 60947-5-3 Supply interruption before de-ener-

20 ms gisation Simultaneity, channel 1 and 2 max. 20 ms Pulse duration Lock/Unlock Re-

quest Processing time activate/deactivate guard locking Environmental data Temperature of metal surface at ambient temperature: 25 C Ambient temperature 40 C 100 ms 570408 350 - 400 ms In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-14 Temperature range Storage temperature 0 - 60 C In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-1/-2 Temperature range

-25 - 70 C Climatic suitability In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-78 Humidity EMC Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 570410 No yes 100 A 1 V 100 A 1 mA DC-13 570410 450 s 1,1 s 1 ms 3 ms 30 ms 50 ms 3 ms 5 ms 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 20 ms 350 - 400 ms 100 ms 570410 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 60 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. h. at 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 67 Technical details Environmental data Vibration 570408 In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-6 Frequency Amplitude Shock stress 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm In accordance with the standard EN 60068-2-27 Number of shocks Acceleration Duration 3 30g 11 ms Airgap creepage Overvoltage category Pollution degree Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Protection type Housing In accordance with UL Mechanical data Length of cable with connector Min. bending radius (fixed perman-

ently) K1 Min. bending radius (moving) K1 Cable diameter K1 Escape release available Mechanical life Holding force FZh III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570408 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,5 mm No 1,000,000 cycles Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator 7.500 N 5.000 N Holding force F1Max in accord-

ance with ISO 14119 Fixing screws in parallel to actu-

ator Fixing screws side-on to actu-

ator Latching force Max. vertical offset Max. lateral offset Max. angular offset around the X axis Max. angular offset around the Y axis Max. angular offset around the Z axis Max. offset in closing direction 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 570410 EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 type 1 570410 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,5 mm No 1,000,000 cycles 7.500 N 5.000 N 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 68 Technical details Mechanical data Max. retract speed of actuator Actuator 1 Min. distance between safety switches Connection type Cable Material 570408 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 570410 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 2.1 0 mm M12, 12-pin male connector LiYY 12 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 0 mm M12, 12-pin male connector LiYY 12 x 0.25 mm2 Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic, galvanised steel, Zn 6 - 6,5 Nm Max. torque setting for fixing screws Max. torque setting escape release 1,2 - 1,5 Nm Max. torque setting for mounting plate Max. torque setting for mounting bracket Min. gate radius Dimensions 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 22 - 24 Nm Height Width Depth Actuator dimensions Height Width Depth Weight of safety switch Weight of actuator Weight 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g 6 - 6,5 Nm 1,2 - 1,5 Nm 22 - 24 Nm 14 - 16 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 950 g 145 g 1.100 g Where standards are undated, the 2015-11 latest editions shall apply. 13.1 Classification according to ZVEI, CB24I The following tables describe the classes and specific values of the product interface and the classes of interfaces compatible with it. The classification is described in the ZVEI posi-

tion paper "Classification of Binary 24 V Interfaces - Functional Safety aspects covered by dynamic testing". Inputs Drain Safety switch Source Safety control system C2, C3 C2 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 69 Technical details Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Test impulse interval Min.

-

9 kOhm

-

1 ms Typ.

-

-

-

-

Max. 500 s

-

1 nF

-

Solenoid inputs Drain Safety switch Drain parameters Test impulse duration Input resistance Capacitive load Safe 1-pole HL outputs Source Safety switch Source parameters Test impulse duration Rated current Capacitive load C2 Min.

-

16 Ohm

-

C2 Min.

-

-

-

Source Safety control system C2, C3 Typ.

-

-

-

Drain Evaluation device Typ.

-

-

-

Max. 500 s 1,5 nF C1, C2 Max. 450 s 0,1 A 70 nF 13.2 Safety characteristic data NOTICE You must comply with the safety characteristic data in order to achieve the required safety level for your plant/machine. Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

1-ch. guard locking PL d Cat. 2 SIL CL 2 2,54E-08 20 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 70 Technical details Operating mode EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 Category EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2015, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2015 TM [year]

2-ch. guard PL e locking 2-ch. OSSD PL e Cat. 4 Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 SIL CL 3 2,54E-08 1,90E-08 20 20 All the units used within a safety function must be considered when calculating the safety characteristic data. INFORMATION A safety function's SIL/PL values are not identical to the SIL/PL values of the units that are used and may be different. We recommend that you use the PAScal software tool to calculate the safety function's SIL/PL values. NOTICE Be sure that you observe the mechanical life. The safety characteristic data are only valid as long as the values of mechanical life are met. Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 71 Supplementary data 14 14.1 Supplementary data Radio approval 14.2 Technical details for mounting bracket without handle unit 570492 CE 570492 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 420 g 570493 CE 570493 3000 N 6000 N 420 g 570494 CE 570494 3000 N 6000 N 445 g 14.3 Technical details for mounting bracket with handle unit 570495 CE 570495 General Approvals Mechanical data Holding force FZh in ac-

cordance with ISO 14119 3000 N Holding force F1max in accordance with ISO 14119 Weight 6000 N 260 g 570496 CE 570496 3000 N 6000 N 600 g 570497 CE 570497 3000 N 6000 N 630 g Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 72 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML Order reference 15 Order reference System 15.1 Product type PSEN ml s 2.1 unit Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, fully coded, for series connection Features PSEN ml s 2.2 unit Mechanical safety gate system with guard locking, uniquely coded, for series connection Mechanical safety switch with guard locking, fully coded, for series con-

nection Actuator, fully coded PSEN ml s 2.1 switch PSEN ml 2.1 actu-

ator 12-pin M12 connector Order no. 570 408 12-pin M12 connector 570 410 12-pin M12 connector 570 409 15.2 Accessories Installation accessories Product type PSEN ml escape re-

lease PSEN ml escape re-

lease extension PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 1.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 2.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.0m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 3.5m PSEN ml escape re-

lease cordset 4.0m PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door Features Escape release stationary Extension escape release stationary 25 mm Escape release with push/pull cable 1.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 2 m Escape release external with push/pull cable 2.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.0 m Escape release with push/pull cable 3.5 m Escape release with push/pull cable 4 m Mounting plate for installing the safety switch, with 4 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head locking screw, M5x40 Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x16 570 481 Order no. 570 460 570 462 570 470 570 471 570 472 570 473 570 474 570 475 570490 570 492 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 73 Order reference Product type PSEN ml bracket swinging door 70 PSEN ml bracket swinging door 80 PSEN ml door handle sliding door PSEN ml door handle swinging door 70 PSEN ml door handle swinging door 80 PSEN screw set bracket swinging door PSEN screw set bracket sliding door Features Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-proof pan head lock-

ing screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a sliding gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x16. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 70 mm. Mounting bracket with handle unit for installing the actuator on a swing gate, with 2 hexagonal socket head screws and 1 tamper-

proof pan head locking screw, M5x12. Height: 80 mm. Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a swing gate Order no. 570 493 570 494 570 495 570 496 570 497 570498 Screw sets for attaching the mounting bracket to a sliding gate 570499 Cable Product type PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 3m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 5m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf, 20m PSEN cable axial M12 8-pole 30m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 0.5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 1.5m Features 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0.5 m 1 m 1.5 m Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 540 321 540 320 540 319 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight 540 326 540 345 540 346 540 333 540 347 74 Order reference Product type PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 2m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 5m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 10m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 20m PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm, 30m PSEN cable M12-12sf 2m PSEN cable M12-12sf 3m PSEN cable M12-12sf 5m PSEN cable M12-12sf 10m PSEN cable M12-12sf 20m PSEN cable M12-12sf 30m PSEN cable M12-12sf 50m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 1m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 2m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 3m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 5m Features 2 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 2 m 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 50 m 1 m 2 m 3 m 5 m 570 351 570 350 540 344 540 343 540 342 540 341 540 340 M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin male con-

nector, straight Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 8-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight 570 357 570 358 570 359 570 352 570 353 570 354 570 355 570 356 570 360 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 75 Order reference Product type PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 10m PSEN cable M12-12sf/

M12-12sm 20m Features 10 m 20 m Series connection Features Product type PSEN ml Y junction M12 PSEN ml end ad-

apter PSEN ml / PSENcs Y junction M12 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin fe-

male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight M12, 12-pin male con-

nector, straight 570 361 570 362 Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector X3 Order no. M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 12-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 8-pin male connector M12, 12-pin fe-

male connector M12, 8-pin fe-

male connector 570 486 570 487 570 489 Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 76 Appendix 16 Appendix The following check list is intended as a guide to provide support during commissioning, re-

commissioning and the prescribed regular testing of the PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2. Note that the check list is not intended to replace the plant-specific safety analysis required for commissioning/recommissioning, nor the resulting inspections and actions. INFORMATION Commissioning, recommissioning and regular inspection may only be car-

ried out by qualified personnel. We recommend that you keep the completed check list and store it with the machine docu-

mentation for reference. Date Action Safety switch Number Actuator Number OK Not OK Notes Signature Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 77 EC declaration of conformity 17 EC declaration of conformity This product/these products meet the requirements of the directive 2006/42/EC for ma-

chinery of the European Parliament and of the Council. The complete EC Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at www.pilz.com/downloads. Authorised representative: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfildern, Germany Operating Manual PSEN ml s 2.1/2.2 1004710-EN-01 78 Front cover y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

8 1 0 2

, 1 0

-

N E

-

0 1 7 4 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnical support is available from Pilz round the clock. AmericasBrazil+55 11 97569-2804Canada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexico+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsiaChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281South Korea+82 31 450 0680Australia+61 3 95600621EuropeAustria+43 1 7986263-0Belgium, Luxembourg+32 9 3217575France+33 3 88104000Germany+49 711 3409-444Ireland+353 21 4804983Italy, Malta+39 0362 1826711Scandinavia+45 74436332Spain+34 938497433Switzerland+41 62 88979-30The Netherlands+31 347 320477Turkey+90 216 5775552United Kingdom+44 1536 462203You can reach our international hotline on: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PAScong, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, THE SPIRIT OF SAFETY are registered and protected trademarks of Pilz GmbH & Co. KG in some countries. We would point out that product features may vary from the details stated in this document, depending on the status at the time of publication and the scope of the equipment. We accept no responsibility for the validity, accuracy and entirety of the text and graphics presented in this information. Please contact our Technical Support if you have any questions.Pilz develops environmentally-friendly products using ecological materials and energy-saving technologies. Oces and production facilities are ecologically designed, environmentally-aware and energy-saving. So Pilz oers sustainability, plus the security of using energy-ecient products and environmentally-friendly solutions.Pilz GmbH & Co. KG Felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostldern, GermanyTel.: +49 711 3409-0 Fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.com200XXXX-EN-0X0-0-2-3-000, 2017-00 Printed in Germany Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, 2017

 

 

PSEN ml

} Sensorik PSEN Bedienungsanleitung 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 Vorwort Dieses Dokument ist das Originaldokument. Alle Rechte an dieser Dokumentation sind der Pilz GmbH & Co. KG vorbehalten. Kopien fr den innerbetrieblichen Bedarf des Benutzers drfen angefertigt werden. Hinweise und An-

regungen zur Verbesserung dieser Dokumentation nehmen wir gerne entgegen. Fr einige Komponenten wurde Quellcode von Fremdherstellern oder Open Source-Soft-

ware verwendet. Die zugehrigen Lizenzinformationen finden Sie im Internet auf der Pilz Homepage. Pilz, PIT, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, Safety-

EYE, SafetyNET p, the spirit of safety sind in einigen Lndern amtlich registrierte und geschtzte Marken der Pilz GmbH & Co. KG. SD bedeutet Secure Digital Inhalt Einfhrung Gltigkeit der Dokumentation Nutzung der Dokumentation Zeichenerklrung Sicherheit Bestimmungsgeme Verwendung Lieferumfang Sicherheitsvorschriften Sicherheitsbetrachtung Qualifikation des Personals Gewhrleistung und Haftung Entsorgung Zu Ihrer Sicherheit Gertemerkmale Funktionsbeschreibung Blockschaltbild Hilfsentsperrung Wiederanlaufsperre Verdrahtung Anschlussbelegung Stecker und Kabel EMV Anforderungen Anschluss an Steuerungen und Auswertegerte Anschluss an Pilz-Auswertegerte Anschlussbeispiel PNOZmulti Einlernen des Bettigers PSEN ml 1.1 Montage Bohrungen Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger montieren Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger montieren Riegel im Bettigergehuse zentrieren Riegel im Bettigergehuse um 90 drehen Montage an Schiebetr Montage an Schwenktr Montage mit Montagewinkel Montage mit Montageplatte Justage Betrieb Normalbetrieb Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 11 11 13 13 13 14 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 20 20 22 22 23 24 24 24 25 27 27 3 Inhalt Fehleranzeige Wiederinbetriebnahme Regelmige Prfungen Abmessungen Technische Daten Sicherheitstechnische Kennzahlen Ergnzende Daten Funkzulassungen Bestelldaten System Zubehr Anhang EG-Konformittserklrung 29 29 30 31 33 35 36 36 36 36 37 37 38 Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 4 PSEN ml b 1.1 Einfhrung Gltigkeit der Dokumentation Die Dokumentation ist gltig fr das Produkt PSEN ml b 1.1. Sie gilt, bis eine neue Doku-

mentation erscheint. Diese Bedienungsanleitung erlutert die Funktionsweise und den Betrieb, beschreibt die Montage und gibt Hinweise zum Anschluss des Produkts. Nutzung der Dokumentation Dieses Dokument dient der Instruktion. Installieren und nehmen Sie das Produkt nur dann in Betrieb, wenn Sie dieses Dokument gelesen und verstanden haben. Bewahren Sie das Dokument fr die knftige Verwendung auf. Zeichenerklrung Besonders wichtige Informationen sind wie folgt gekennzeichnet:

GEFAHR!

Beachten Sie diesen Hinweis unbedingt! Er warnt Sie vor unmittelbar dro-

henden Gefahren, die schwerste Krperverletzungen und Tod verursachen knnen, und weist auf entsprechende Vorsichtsmanahmen hin. WARNUNG!

Beachten Sie diesen Hinweis unbedingt! Er warnt Sie vor gefhrlichen Si-

tuationen, die schwerste Krperverletzungen und Tod verursachen knnen, und weist auf entsprechende Vorsichtsmanahmen hin. ACHTUNG!

weist auf eine Gefahrenquelle hin, die leichte oder geringfgige Verletzun-

gen sowie Sachschaden zur Folge haben kann, und informiert ber entspre-

chende Vorsichtsmanahmen. WICHTIG beschreibt Situationen, durch die das Produkt oder Gerte in dessen Umge-

bung beschdigt werden knnen, und gibt entsprechende Vorsichtsma-

nahmen an. Der Hinweis kennzeichnet auerdem besonders wichtige Text-

stellen. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 5 PSEN ml b 1.1 INFO liefert Anwendungstipps und informiert ber Besonderheiten. Sicherheit Bestimmungsgeme Verwendung Das sichere Schutztrsystem dient zur Zuhaltung und Verriegelung von Schwenk- und Schiebetren. Ein Entsperren des Schutztrsystems ist erst mglich, wenn die gefahrbringende Maschi-

nenfunktion beendet ist (Entsperren mit Bedingung). Die gefahrbringende Maschinenfunktion darf nur unter folgenden Bedingungen ausgefhrt werden:

}

}

an den Sicherheitsausgngen 12 und 22 liegt ein High-Signal und an den Sicherheitseingngen S31 (Lock/Unlock Request 1) und S41 (Lock/Unlock Re-

quest 2) liegt ein Low-Signal. Die Sicherheitseingnge S31 und S41 (Hubmagnetansteuerung) drfen nur unter folgender Bedingung angesteuert werden:

} Anlage befindet sich im sicheren Zustand Stellen Sie dies in der Sicherheitssteuerung durch eine UND-Verknpfung unmittelbar vor der Ansteuerung des Ausgangs sicher. Der Sicherheitsschalter erfllt die Anforderungen nach:

} EN 60947-5-3 mit dem Bettiger PSEN ml 1.1 : PDDB

} EN 62061: SIL CL 3

} EN ISO 13849-1: PL e (Cat. 4 )

} ENISO14119: Codierungsstufe gering, Bauart 4 Der Sicherheitsschalter darf nur mit dem zugehrigen Bettiger PSEN ml 1.1 verwendet werden. Der Sicherheitslevel PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 wird nur erreicht, wenn

}

}

die Sicherheitsausgnge 2-kanalig weiterverarbeitet werden der Hubmagnet 2-kanalig durch sichere, getestete Ausgnge, geeignet fr PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 -Anwendungen, angesteuert wird. Vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung

} Die Sicherheitsausgnge 12 und 22 des sicheren Schutztrsystem PSEN ml b 1.1 dr-

fen nicht an externe Spannungsquellen angeschlossen werden. Lieferumfang

} Sicherheitsschalter PSEN ml b 1.1

} Bettiger PSEN ml 1.1 Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 6 PSEN ml b 1.1

} Zylinderstift (5,5mm, Lnge40 mm, ToleranzH6) fr die Befestigung des Sicher-

heitsschalters bei Einbau quer zum Bettiger Sicherheitsvorschriften Sicherheitsbetrachtung Vor dem Einsatz eines Gerts ist eine Sicherheitsbetrachtung nach der Maschinenrichtlinie notwendig. Fr das Produkt als Einzelkomponente ist funktionale Sicherheit garantiert. Dies garantiert jedoch nicht die funktionale Sicherheit der gesamten Maschine/Anlage. Um den gewnsch-

ten Sicherheitslevel der gesamten Maschine/Anlage erreichen zu knnen, definieren Sie fr die Maschine/Anlage die Sicherheitsanforderungen und wie sie technisch und organisato-

risch realisiert werden mssen. Qualifikation des Personals Aufstellung, Montage, Programmierung, Inbetriebsetzung, Betrieb, Auerbetriebsetzung und Wartung der Produkte drfen nur von befhigten Personen vorgenommen werden. Eine befhigte Person ist eine Person, die durch ihre Berufsausbildung, ihre Berufserfah-

rung und ihre zeitnahe berufliche Ttigkeit ber die erforderlichen Fachkenntnisse verfgt, um Gerte, Systeme, Maschinen und Anlagen gem den allgemein gltigen Standards und den Richtlinien der Sicherheitstechnik prfen, beurteilen und handhaben zu knnen. Der Betreiber ist auerdem verpflichtet, nur Personen einzusetzen, die

} mit den grundlegenden Vorschriften zur Arbeitssicherheit und Unfallverhtung vertraut

}

}

sind, den Abschnitt Sicherheit in dieser Beschreibung gelesen und verstanden haben, und mit den fr die spezielle Anwendung geltenden Grund- und Fachnormen vertraut sind. Gewhrleistung und Haftung Gewhrleistungs- und Haftungsansprche gehen verloren, wenn

}

}

}

}

das Produkt nicht bestimmungsgem verwendet wurde, die Schden auf Nichtbeachtung der Bedienungsanleitung zurckzufhren sind, das Betreiberpersonal nicht ordnungsgem ausgebildet ist, oder Vernderungen irgendeiner Art vorgenommen wurden (z. B. Austauschen von Bauteilen auf den Leiterplatten, Ltarbeiten usw). Entsorgung

} Beachten Sie bei sicherheitsgerichteten Anwendungen die Gebrauchsdauer TM in den sicherheitstechnischen Kennzahlen.

} Beachten Sie bei der Auerbetriebsetzung die lokalen Gesetze zur Entsorgung von elektronischen Gerten (z. B. Elektro- und Elektronikgertegesetz). Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 7 PSEN ml b 1.1 Zu Ihrer Sicherheit WARNUNG!

Verlust der Sicherheitsfunktion durch Manipulation des Verriegelungs- und Zuhaltungssystems Die Manipulation des Verriegelungs- und Zuhaltungssystems kann zu schwersten Krperverletzungen oder Tod fhren. Verhindern Sie, dass das Verriegelungs- und Zuhaltungssystem durch Einsatz eines Ersatzbettigers manipuliert wird. Bewahren Sie den Ersatzbettiger an einem sicheren Ort auf und schtzen Sie ihn vor unbefugten Zugriffen. Werden Ersatzbettiger verwendet, so mssen diese montiert wer-

den, wie in Montage [

16] beschrieben. Werden die ursprnglich montierten Betgiger durch Ersatzbettiger ersetzt, so mssen die ursprnglich montierten Bettiger vor der Ent-

sorgung zerstrt werden. 2 Sicherheitsausgnge (Schlieer) sichere Zuhaltung fr Schwenk- und Schiebetren sichere Verriegelung (Positionsberwachung) Gertemerkmale

}

}

} Transpondertechnik

}

} Querschlussberwachung zwischen den Sicherheitsausgngen

} Zuhaltungselement verhindert das unbeabsichtigte ffnen der Schutztr

} Hilfsentsperrung zum ffnen der Schutztr

}

}

} Pilz-Codierungstyp: codiert

} M12, 8-pol. Stiftstecker

}

1 Meldeausgang (Schlieer) fr links- und rechts angeschlagene Schutztren geeignet LED-Anzeige:

Versorgungsspannung/Fehler Status des Bettigers Status der Zuhaltung Input leuchtet gelb (ohne Funktion)

} Der Riegel im Bettiger kann vor der Montage des Bettigers um 90 im Bettigerge-

huse gedreht werden. Dadurch kann der Bettiger senkrecht oder waagerecht mon-

tiert werden. Funktionsbeschreibung Das Verriegelungs- und Zuhaltungssystem verhindert, dass die Schutztr zum Gefahrenbe-

reich geffnet werden kann, solange die Gefahr bringende Maschine eingeschaltet ist. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 8 PSEN ml b 1.1 Abhngig von der Position des Bettigers und dem Signalverlauf der Sicherheitseingnge S31 und S41 (Hubmagnetansteuerung) liegt an den Sicherheitsausgngen ein High- oder Low-Signal an. Tr offen Tr geschlossen Sicherheitsausgnge 12 und 22 An den Sicherheitsausgngen 12 und 22 liegt unter diesen Bedingungen ein High-Signal:

}

}

der Bettiger wird erkannt und der Zuhaltebolzen wurde erfogreich aktiviert (Zuhaltebolzen befindet sich in der Zuhalteposition) Ist eine der Bedingungen nicht erfllt, liegt an den Sicherheitsausgngen ein Low-Signal. Meldeausgang Y32 Am Meldeausgang Y32 liegt ein High-Signal, wenn der Bettiger im Ansprechbereich ist

(Schutztr geschlossen). Sicherheitseingnge S31 und S41 (Hubmagnetansteuerung)

}

Liegt an den Sicherheitseingngen S31 und S41 ein Low-Signal, ndert der Zuhaltebol-

zen seine Position nicht. Die Zuhaltung wird durch ein High-Signal (Lnge 2+/-0,5 s ) an den Eingngen S31 und S41 aktiviert (Hubmagnetansteuerung). Nach der Aktivierung mssen die Eingnge Low-

Signale fhren. Ein erneuter Impuls (Lnge 2+/-0,5 s ) an diesen Eingngen deaktiviert die Zuhaltung. Eine Deaktivierung der Zuhaltung darf erst erfolgen, nachdem die gefhrliche Bewegung beendet wurde. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 9 SicherheitsschalterBettigerSicherheitsschalterBettiger PSEN ml b 1.1 Zeitdiagramm Legende

[1] Tr ist offen

[2] Tr ist geschlossen

[3] Zuhaltung ist aktiviert

[4] Ausfhrung der gefahrbringenden Maschinenfunktion erlaubt

[5] Ausgnge werden deaktiviert

[6] Zuhaltung wird deaktiviert

[7] Tr ist offen

[t1] Verarbeitungszeit Zuhaltesignal = 100 ms

[t2] Zeitfenster fr die nderung des Zuhaltungsstatus Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 10 ZuhaltungBettigerS31 + S41Y3212 + 22[1][2][3][5][6][7][4][t1][t1][t2]PSEN ml b 1.1 Blockschaltbild Hilfsentsperrung Die Hilfsentsperrung ermglicht das ffnen der Zuhaltung von der Zugangsseite aus zum Gefahrenbereich. INFO Wird die Zuhaltung mit Hilfsentsperrung deaktiviert, liegt an den Sicherheits-

ausgngen 12 und 22 ein Low-Signal an. Ein Fehlercode wird ausgegeben

(siehe Kapitel Fehleranzeige [

selt in den Fehlerzustand. 29]) und der Sicherheitsschalter wech-

Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 11 ActuatorA1A21222&S31S41UBDeviceReceiverSafety GateMagnetLock&PowerY32Lock Sensor 1Lock Sensor 2&Y1 PSEN ml b 1.1 Legende

[1] Hilfsentsperrungsschraube Torx T10

[2] Sicherungsschraube Torx T10, im Auslieferungszustand mit Lack versiegelt Funktionsweise:

1. Entfernen Sie die Sicherungsschraube [2] mit einem Torx-Schraubendreher T10. 2. Drehen Sie die Hilfsentsperrungsschraube [1] mit einem Torx-Schraubendreher T10 ei-

ne halbe Umdrehung gegen den Uhrzeigersinn. Der Zuhaltebolzen wird verschoben und der Riegel wird freigegeben. Die Schutztre zum Gefahrenbereich kann geffnet werden. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 12

[1][2]PSEN ml b 1.1 Wiederanlaufsperre Um einen Wiederanlauf der Maschine zu verhindern, whrend sich eine Person im Gefah-

renbereich befindet, kann ein Vorhngeschloss in das Durchgangsloch am Bettiger einge-

hngt werden (siehe Abbildung). Dadurch kann der Bettiger nicht in den Sicherheitsschal-

ter einfahren, die Zuhaltung wird nicht aktiviert und ein Anlaufen der Maschine wird verhin-

dert. Legende

[1] Durchgangsloch am Bettiger zum Einhngen eines Vorhngeschlosses

[2] Vorhngeschloss

[3] Bettiger Soll die Wiederanlaufsperre parallel mit mehreren Schlssern versperrt sein, kann ein Mehrfachschloss eingesetzt werden (z.B. Brady Lockout-Vorrichtung Art.Nr.852439). Verdrahtung Beachten Sie:

} Angaben in den Technischen Daten [

Anschlussbelegung Stecker und Kabel 33] unbedingt einhalten. 8-poliger M12-Stiftstecker PIN 1 2 3 Funktion Ansteuerung des Hubma-

gneten zum ffnen und Schliessen der Zuhaltung

(Kanal 2)

+24 V UB Sicherheitsausgang Kanal 1 Klemmenbezeichnung S41 Adernfarbe (Pilz Kabel) wei A1 12 braun grn Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 13

[1][2][3]PSEN ml b 1.1 PIN 4 5 6 7 8 Funktion Sicherheitsausgang Kanal 2 Meldeausgang/Diagnose-

ausgang Ansteuerung des Hubma-

gneten zum ffnen und Schliessen der Zuhaltung

(Kanal 1) 0 V UB reserviert Klemmenbezeichnung 22 Adernfarbe (Pilz Kabel) gelb Y32 S31 A2 Y1 grau rosa blau rot WICHTIG Die Farbkennzeichnung fr die Anschlussleitung gilt nur fr die als Zubehr erhltlichen Kabel von Pilz EMV Anforderungen

} Beachten Sie die Verdrahtungs- und EMV-Anforderungen der IEC 60204-1.

} Das Netzteil muss den Vorschriften fr Kleinspannungen mit sicherer Trennung (SELV, PELV) entsprechen.

} Die Ein- und Ausgnge des Sicherheitsschalters mssen eine sichere Trennung zu Spannungen ber 60VDC aufweisen. INFO Verwenden Sie ausschlielich Sicherheitsschaltgerte mit einer Versor-

gungsspannung von 24VDC. Sicherheitsschaltgerte mit Weitbereichs-

netzteil oder in der Gertevariante AC haben eine interne Potenzialtrennung und sind als Auswertegerte nicht geeignet.

} UL-Anforderung: Die Versorgungsspannung des Sicherheitsschalters muss mit einer Sicherung vom Typ flink (siehe Technische Daten [

33]) abgesichert werden. Anschluss an Steuerungen und Auswertegerte Stellen Sie sicher, dass das ausgewhlte Auswertegert folgende Eigenschaften hat:

}

2-kanalig mit Plausibilittsberwachung Beide OSSDs mssen den Schaltzustand synchron ndern. Das Auswertegert muss insbesondere berwachen, dass beide OSSDs im Zustand "Tr offen" waren, bevor beide wieder den Zustand "Tr geschlossen" einnehmen und umgekehrt.

} OSSD-Signale werden 2-kanalig ausgewertet

}

vor und nach dem Aktivieren der Sicherheitseingnge S31 und S41 (Hubmagnetan-

steuerung) muss der Zustand der OSSDs geprft werden (siehe Zeitdiagramm [

10]) Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 14 PSEN ml b 1.1 WARNUNG!

Mglicher Verlust der Sicherheitsfunktion durch fehlende Prfung des siche-

ren Zustands Abhngig von der Anwendung knnen schwerste Krperverletzungen und Tod verursacht werden. Prfen Sie durch Auswertegert/Sicherheitssteuerung, ob sich die Anlage im sicheren Zustand befindet. Steuern Sie den Hubmagnet des PSEN ml b 1.1 ber S31/S41 nur an, wenn sich die Anlage im sicheren Zustand befindet.

} Einsatz in PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 -Anwendungen die Sicherheitseingnge S31 und S41 (Hubmagnetansteuerung) werden 2-kanalig durch sichere Ausgnge angesteuert, die fr PL e (Cat. 4 )/SIL CL 3 -Anwendungen geeignet sind Anschluss an Pilz-Auswertegerte Der Sicherheitsschalter PSEN ml b 1.1 kann beispielsweise an Auswertegerte von Pilz an-

geschlossen werden. Geeignete Pilz-Auswertegerte sind zum Beispiel:

} PNOZmulti fr Schutztrberwachung Konfigurieren Sie den Schalter im PNOZmulti Configurator mit Schaltertyp 3.

} PSS fr Schutztrberwachung mit Standardfunktionsbaustein SB064, SB066 oder FS_SafetyGate Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 15 24 V0 VA1A21222I2 (FS)I1 (FS)FS: FailsafeA1A2S31S41Y32O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1BettigerSicherheitsschalterSicherheitssteuerungAnsteuerung Zuhaltung PSEN ml b 1.1

} PSSuniversal PLC fr Schutztrberwachung mit Funktionsbaustein FS_SafetyGate Der korrekte Anschluss am jeweiligen Auswertegert ist in der Bedienungsanleitung zum Auswertegert beschrieben. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Anschluss nach den Vorgaben in der Bedienungsanleitung des ausgewhlten Auswertegerts durchgefhrt wird. Beispielhaft ist der Anschluss an PNOZmulti dargestellt. Anschlussbeispiel PNOZmulti Einlernen des Bettigers PSEN ml 1.1 Es wird jeder zugehrige Bettiger von Pilz (siehe Technische Daten [

sobald er in den Ansprechbereich gebracht wird. 33]) erkannt, Montage

} Montieren Sie Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger parallel gegenberliegend. INFO Sichern Sie den Bettiger gegen unbefugtes Entfernen und vor Verschmut-

zung.

} Einbaumanahmen nach EN ISO 14119 Verwenden Sie fr die Befestigung von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger nicht ls-

bare Sicherheitsschrauben mit flacher Kopfunterseite (z.B. Zylinderkopf- oder -

Flachkopfschrauben) oder Nieten. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 16 A1A2I0I1A1A2Y32Y1122212345678PNOZmultiPSENmlock0 V24 VS31S41O2 (FS)O1 (FS)I1Ansteuerung Zuhaltung PSEN ml b 1.1 Verwenden Sie fr die Befestigung von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger die glei-

che Schraubenart. Bauen Sie Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger verdeckt ein.

} Verhindern Sie, dass Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger starken Sten oder Schwin-

gungen ausgesetzt werden

} Die Befestigung des Sicherheitsschalters und Bettigers muss ausreichend stabil sein, um den ordnungsgemen Betrieb des Sicherheitsschalters und Bettigers zu gewhr-

leisten.

} Verwenden Sie fr die Befestigung von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger M5-Schrau-

ben der Festigkeitsklasse8,8 fr eine Mindesteinschraubtiefe von 6mm.

} Verhindern Sie eine Selbstlockerung der Befestigungselemente am Sicherheitsschalter und am Bettiger. am Sicherheitsschalter: durch Drehmoment (siehe Technische Daten [

am Bettiger: durch Drehmoment (siehe Technische Daten [

schlssige Schraubensicherung 33]) 33]) und stoff-

} Anzugsdrehmoment: Beachten Sie die Angaben in den Technischen Daten [

33].

} Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger nicht als Anschlag benutzt werden knnen.

} Fr die Befestigung des Sicherheitsschalters sind auf 3 Seiten Bohrungen angebracht 24] oder einen Montagewinkel [

fr die Befestigung an den drei mglichen Montagepositionen. Damit kann der Sicherheitsschalter an Trrahmen von Schiebetren und Schwenktren mit Links- und Rechtsanschlag montiert werden. Verwenden Sie bei Bedarf eine Montageplatte [

Zubehr [

Je nach Position des Sicherheitsschalters zum Bettiger ergeben sich unterschiedliche Zuhaltekrfte. Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger [

Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger [

20]: 5.000 N , F1max = 10.000 N 20]: 7.500 N , F1max = 15.000 N 24] (siehe Bestelldaten 37]). Bohrungen

} Bohrungen Je nach Position des Sicherheitsschalters zum Bettiger und der Verwendung einer Montageplatte fr die Befestigung des Sicherheitsschalters an der Montageflche mssen unterschiedliche Bohrungen angebracht werden. Die Bohrungen mssen mindestens 6mm tief sein. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 17 PSEN ml b 1.1 Montage des Sicherheitsschalters Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger ohne Montageplatte Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger mit Montageplatte Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger oh-

ne Montageplatte Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger mit Montageplatte Bohrungen Bohrungen fr vier M5-Schrauben an der Montageflche. Bohrungen fr zwei M5-Schrauben an der Montageflche fr die Befestigung der Mon-

tageplatte.

} Bohrungen fr drei M5-Schrauben an der Montageflche.

} Eine Bohrung fr Zylinderstift 5,5mmH13 (-0mm, +0,18mm) an der Position, die dem Bettiger am nchsten liegt.

} Bohrungen fr zwei M5-Schrauben an der Montageflche fr die Befestigung der Montageplatte.

} Die Bohrung an der Montageplatte, die dem Bettiger am nchsten liegt, auf 5,5mmH13 (-0mm, +0,18mm) muss aufgeweitet werden. Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger ohne Montageplatte Versehen Sie die Montageflche mit Boh-

rungen wie angegeben. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 18 3119,2193,54,5 PSEN ml b 1.1 Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger mit Montageplatte Versehen Sie die Montageflche mit Boh-

rungen wie angegeben. Weiten Sie die Bohrung an der Montage-

platte, die dem Bettiger am nchsten liegt, auf 5,5mmH13 (-0mm, +0,18mm) auf. Bettiger ohne Montagewinkel Versehen Sie die Montageflche mit Boh-

rungen fr zwei M5-Schrauben (siehe Abbil-

dung). Bettiger mit Montagewinkel Versehen Sie die Montageflche mit Boh-

rungen fr zwei M5-Schrauben (siehe Abbil-

dung). Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 19 M5 5,35 1048 M6,5 PSEN ml b 1.1 Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger montieren Befestigen Sie den Schalter mit vier M5-Schrauben an der Montageflche.

} Anzugsdrehmoment: Beachten Sie die Angaben in den Technischen Daten [

33]. Abb.: Befestigung auf Seite frontal zum Bettiger Legende

[1] Befestigung auf Seite frontal zum Bettiger

[2] Bettiger

[3] M5-Schrauben Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger montieren Setzen Sie den mitgeliefer-

ten Zylinderstift in das Befes-

tigungsloch am Sicherheits-

schalter, das dem Bettiger am nchsten liegt (siehe

[1]). Pressen Sie den Zylin-

derstift mit Durchschlag und Hammer ein. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 20 XY[3][3][1][2][1]PSEN ml b 1.1 Schlagen Sie den Zylinder-

stift [1] vollstndig ein. Der Zylinderstift muss bndig mit der Bohrung abschlieen Fixieren Sie den Sicherheits-

schalter mit drei Schrauben

[2] an der Montageflche. Ziehen Sie die drei Schrau-

ben [2] am Sicherheitsschal-

ter vollstndig an. Anzugsdrehmoment: Beach-

ten Sie die Angaben in den Technischen Daten [

33]. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 21

[1][2][2][2][1]PSEN ml b 1.1 Riegel im Bettigergehuse zentrieren Damit die Abstnde bei sich setzenden Tren noch eingehalten werden knnen, muss der Riegel im Bettigergehuse zentriert werden. Zentrieren Sie den Riegel im Bettigergehuse (siehe Abbildung). Riegel im Bettigergehuse zentriert Riegel nicht im Bettigergehuse zentriert Riegel im Bettigergehuse um 90 drehen Der Bettiger kann senkrecht an einer Tr montiert werden (siehe Abbildung [

9]). Fr eine waagerechte Montage des Bettigers kann der Riegel vor der Montage im Bettiger-

gehuse um 90 gedreht werden. 1. Drcken Sie die Federplatte [1] im Bettigergehuse am Gehusebalg [3] auf beiden Seiten des Riegels herunter und halten Sie die Platte gedrckt. 2. Drehen Sie den Riegel im Gehusebalg um 90 in die gewnschte Richtung ([2]). Legende

[1] Federplatte im Gehusebalg

[2] Riegel, drehbar um 90

[3] Gehusebalg 3. Zentrieren Sie den Riegel im Bettigergehuse [

22]. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 22

[1][2][3]PSEN ml b 1.1 Montage an Schiebetr Legende

[1] Sicherheitsschalter am Trrahmen montiert

[2] Bettiger mit Montagewinkel (als Zubehr [

tiert 37] lieferbar) an Schiebetr mon-

1. Montieren Sie den Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger [

20] oder quer zum Bettiger [

20] am Trrahmen. 2. Fixieren Sie den Bettiger mit zwei M5-Schrauben an der Tr. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 23

[1][2]PSEN ml b 1.1 Montage an Schwenktr Abb.: Schwenktr mit Innen- und Auenanschlag Legende

[1]

[2]

Sicherheitsschalter am Trrahmen Bettiger an Schwenktr montiert 1. Montieren Sie den Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger [

20] oder quer zum Bettiger [

20] am Trrahmen. 2. Fixieren Sie den Bettiger mit zwei M5-Schrauben an der Tr. Montage mit Montagewinkel 1. Bringen Sie den Montagewinkel an der Schiebetr an. 2. Fixieren Sie den Bettiger mit zwei M5 Sicherheitsschrauben am Montagewinkel. Abb.: Bettiger an Montagewinkel montiert Montage mit Montageplatte 1. Bringen Sie die Montageplatte an der Schiebetr an. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 24

[1][2][2]PSEN ml b 1.1 2. Befestigen Sie den Sicherheitsschalter mit vier M5 Sicherheitsschrauben [

20] an der Montageplatte. Abb.: Sicherheitsschalter an Montageplatte montiert Justage Beachten Sie:

} Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger mssen korrekt ausgerichtet sein

} Abstnde werden eingehalten wie in folgender Abbildung angegeben

} Bettiger ist zentriert (siehe Riegel im Bettigergehuse zentrieren [

22])

} Prfen Sie die Funktion immer mit einem der zugelassenen Auswertegerte. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 25 PSEN ml b 1.1

[1] Bettiger

[2] Sicherheitsschalter

[3] max. Seitenversatz

[4] max. Hhenversatz

[5] max. Winkelversatz X-Richtung

[6] max. Winkelversatz Y-Richtung

[7] max. Winkelversatz Z-Richtung

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger befestigen Nach der korrekten Ausrichtung von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger muss die Verschrau-

bung des Bettigers angezogen werden. 1. Ziehen Sie eine M5-Schraube an. 2. Tauschen Sie bei Anwendungen mit erhhten Sicherheitsanforderungen (z.B. SIL CL 3 PL e) die zweite M5-Schraube gegen eine M5-Sicherheitsschraube 3. Ziehen Sie die M5-Schraube oder M5-Sicherheitsschraube an. Beachten Sie das max. Anzugsdrehmoment in den Technischen Daten [

33]. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 26

[1][2][3][4][1][2][6][5][7]PSEN ml b 1.1 Betrieb WICHTIG Fhren Sie nach der Erstinbetriebnahme und nach jeder nderung der Ma-

schine/Anlage eine Prfung der Sicherheitsfunktion durch. Die Prfung der Sicherheitsfunktion darf ausschlielich durch qualifiziertes Personal durch-

gefhrt werden. Statusanzeigen:

}

}

}

}

LED "Device" leuchtet grn: Gert ist betriebsbereit LED "Safety Gate" leuchtet gelb: Bettiger befindet sich im Ansprechbereich LED "Lock" leuchtet grn: Zuhaltung aktiv LED "Input" leuchtet gelb: Gert ist betriebsbereit Legende:

LED aus LED an LED blinkt (500ms an, 500ms aus) LED blitzt (50ms an, 950ms aus) LED blitzt schnell (25ms an, 475ms aus) Normalbetrieb LED-Status Device Safety Gate Input Lock Schalterstatus grn gelb gelb grn grn grn gelb gelb gelb grn gelb gelb grn PSEN ml b 1.1 wird gestartet Schutztr offen, Bettiger nicht er-

kannt, Zuhaltung deaktiviert Schutztr geschlossen, Bettiger er-

kannt, Zuhaltung deaktiviert Schutztr geschlossen, Bettiger er-

kannt, Zuhaltung aktiviert Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 27 PSEN ml b 1.1 Warnungen LED-Status Device Safety Gate Input Lock grn gelb gelb grn Anzeige nicht magebend Anzeige nicht magebend gelb gelb Schalterstatus Schutztr ge-

schlossen, Bet-

tiger erkannt, Zu-

haltung kann nicht aktiviert /

deaktiviert wer-

den Die Versorgungs-

spannung an den Sicherheitsein-

gngen S31 und S41 wurde wie-

der eingeschal-

tet, bevor die Hilfsentsper-

rungsschraube zurck gedreht wurde. Sicherheitsschal-

ter aktiv trotz ber- oder Un-

terspannung Abhilfe / Ma-

nahme berprfen Sie die Ausrichtung [

des Bettigers zum Sicherheits-

schalter. 25]

Drehen Sie die Hilfsentsper-

rungsschraube zurck und schalten Sie da-

nach die Versor-

gungsspannung ein (siehe Wiederinbetriebn ahme [

29]). Kontrollieren Sie die Versorgungs-

spannung. Werden bei Un-

terspannungs-

warnung die Si-

cherheitseingn-

ge S31 und S41 aktiviert oder de-

aktiviert, wech-

selt der Sicher-

heitsschalter in den Fehlerzu-

stand. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 28 PSEN ml b 1.1 Fehleranzeige LED-Status Device Safety Gate Input Lock rot gelb gelb vorherige LED-Anzeige bleibt bestehen rot rot keine Be-

deu-

tung Schalterstatus Abhilfe / Ma-

nahme Sicherheitsschal-

ter deaktiviert wegen Unter-

oder berspan-

nung Sicherheitsaus-

gnge im Fehler-

zustand Hilfsentriegelung bettigt Fehler Sicherheitsschal-

ter startet nicht berprfen Sie die Versorgungs-

spannung und schalten Sie die Versorgungs-

spannung aus und wieder ein. berprfen Sie die Verdrahtung und schalten Sie die Versorgungs-

spannung aus und wieder ein. Drehen Sie die Hilfsentsper-

rungsschraube zurck und schalten Sie da-

nach die Versor-

gungsspannung ein (siehe Wiederinbetriebn ahme [

Nehmen Sie Kontakt zu Pilz auf. Tauschen Sie den Sicherheits-

schalter aus 29]). grn gelb gelb Anzeige nicht magebend Falscher Betti-

ger Verwenden Sie den Bettiger PSEN ml 1.1 . Wiederinbetriebnahme PSEN ml b 1.1 wieder in Betrieb nehmen 1. Drehen Sie die Hilfsentsperrungsschraube [1] (siehe Abbildung [

12]) mit einem Torx-Schraubendreher T10 eine halbe Umdrehung im Uhrzeigersinn. 2. Drehen Sie die Sicherungsschraube [2] (siehe Abbildung [

12]) mit einem Torx-

Schraubendreher T10 wieder ein. 3. Versiegeln Sie die Sicherungsschraube mit Lack. 4. Schalten Sie die Spannung aus und wieder ein. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 29 PSEN ml b 1.1 5. Fhren Sie eine Funktionsprfung des Sicherheitsschalters und des Bettigers durch. Die Prfung der Sicherheitsfunktion darf ausschlielich durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgefhrt werden. INFO Wird die Hilfsentsperrungsschraube nach der Benutzung nicht korrekt zu-

rckgedreht, wechselt der PSEN ml b 1.1 in den Fehlerzustand. Regelmige Prfungen Pilz empfiehlt, mindestens monatlich eine manuelle Funktionsprfung des Sicherheitsschal-

ters und des Bettigers durchzufhren. Die Prfung der Sicherheitsfunktion darf aus-

schlielich durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgefhrt werden. Sie finden im Anhang eine Checkliste [

37], die Sie bei der Prfung untersttzen soll. Inhalte der Prfung:

} Prfen Sie, ob die Versiegelung der Sicherungsschraube der Hilfsentsperrung unver-

sehrt ist. Wenn die Versiegelung nicht unversehrt ist, stellen Sie sicher dass die Siche-

rungsschraube eingedreht ist und versiegeln Sie die Sicherungsschraube mit Lack.

} Prfen Sie den Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger auf Beschdigungen.

} Stellen Sie den festen Sitz von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger sicher.

} Prfen Sie den Versatz von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger. max. Seitenversatz max. Winkelversatz max. Hhenversatz

} Prfen Sie den korrekten Zustand der Verdrahtung.

} Entfernen Sie Schmutz von Sicherheitsschalter und Bettiger. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 30 PSEN ml b 1.1 Abmessungen Sicherheitsschalter Bettiger Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 31 3119,2193,54,54031230484063,529536740 PSEN ml b 1.1 Montagewinkel fr Schiebetr (siehe Zubehr [

37]) Montageplatte (siehe Zubehr [

37]) Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 32 A-A AAR2059,25R7,7563,548`0,24060207,7510`0,310`0,35 x 4540`0,2302x M5n6,52x 11,7520193,5`0,243,2512,5255`0,24010`0,331`0,2204,5n8,52x 4x M55 x 45280 PSEN ml b 1.1 Technische Daten Allgemein Zulassungen Funktionsweise Sensor Codierungsstufe nach EN ISO 14119 Bauart nach EN ISO 14119 Klassifizierung nach EN 60947-5-3 Pilz-Codierungstyp Elektrische Daten Versorgungsspannung Spannung Art Spannungstoleranz Max. Schaltfrequenz Magnet. Versorgungsspannnung Max. Magnetstrom t <150 ms Max. Leitungskapazitt an den Sicherheitsausgngen Leerlauf, PNOZ mit Relaiskontakten PNOZmulti, PNOZelog, PSS Max. Einschaltstromimpuls Stromimpuls A1 Impulsdauer A1 Max. Gertesicherung nach UL Leerlaufstrom Eingnge Anzahl Spannung an Eingngen Eingangsstrombereich Halbleiterausgnge Sicherheitsausgnge OSSD Meldeausgnge Schaltstrom pro Ausgang Schaltleistung pro Ausgang Reststrom bei "0"-Signal Kurzschlussfest Reststrom an Ausgngen Spannungsabfall an OSSDs Gebrauchskategorie nach EN 60947-1 Zeiten Max. Testimpulsdauer Sicherheitsausgnge Einschaltverzgerung nach Anlegen von UB Bettiger typ. Bettiger max. CE, FCC, IC, TV, UL/cUL Transponder gering 4 PDDB codiert 24 V DC

-15 %/+20 %

1 Hz 24 V 1 A 40 nF 70 nF 5 A 0,0002 ms 3 A 30 mA 2 24 V DC 0,5 A 2 1 100 mA 2,4 W 2 mA ja 500 A 1,5 V DC-13 450 s 1,1 s 30 ms 50 ms Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 33 PSEN ml b 1.1 Zeiten Rckfallverzgerung Bettiger typ. Bettiger max. Risikozeit nach EN 60947-5-3 berbrckung bei Spannungseinbrchen der Versor-

gungsspannung Gleichzeitigkeit Kanal 1 und 2 max. Impulsdauer Lock/Unlock Request Verarbeitungszeit Zuhaltung aktivieren/deaktivieren Umweltdaten Temperatur Metallflche Umgebungstemperatur nach Norm Temperaturbereich Lagertemperatur nachNorm Temperaturbereich Feuchtebeanspruchung nach Norm Feuchtigkeit EMV Schwingungen nach Norm Frequenz Amplitude Schockbeanspruchung nach Norm Anzahl der Schocks Beschleunigung Dauer Luft- und Kriechstrecken berspannungskategorie Verschmutzungsgrad Bemessungsisolationsspannung Bemessungsstospannungsfestigkeit Schutzart Gehuse Mechanische Daten Lnge Kabel mit Stecker Min. Biegeradius (beim Verlegen) K1 Min. Biegeradius (bei stndiger Bewegung) K1 Kabeldurchmesser K1 Fluchtentriegelung vorhanden Lebensdauer mechanisch 30 ms 40 ms 260 ms 20 ms 2+/-0,5 s 100 ms 40 C EN 60068-2-14 0 - 55 C EN 60068-2-1/-2

-25 - 70 C EN 60068-2-78 93 % r. F. bei 40 C EN 55011: class A, EN 60947-5-3, EN 61326-3-1 EN 60068-2-6 10 - 55 Hz 1 mm EN 60068-2-27 3 30g 11 ms III 3 75 V 0,8 kV IP67 230 mm 5 x 10 x 6,2 mm nein 1.000.000 Zyklen Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 34 PSEN ml b 1.1 Mechanische Daten Zuhaltekraft FZh nach ISO 14119 Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger Zuhaltekraft F1Max nach ISO 14119 Sicherheitsschalter frontal zum Bettiger Sicherheitsschalter quer zum Bettiger Rastkraft Max. Hhenversatz Max. Seitenversatz Max. Winkelversatz um X Achse Max. Winkelversatz um Y Achse Max. Winkelversatz um Z Achse Max. Versatz in Schlierichtung Max. Einfahrgeschwindigkeit Bettiger Bettiger 1 Min. Abstand zwischen Sicherheitsschaltern Anschlussart Leitung Max. Leitungslnge Material Max. Anzugsdrehmoment Befestigungsschrauben Min. Trradius Abmessungen Hhe Breite Tiefe Abmessungen Bettiger Hhe Breite Tiefe Gewicht Sicherheitsschalter Gewicht Bettiger Gewicht 7.500 N 5.000 N 15.000 N 10.000 N 30 N

+/-3,0 mm

+/-3,0 mm

+/-2,0 deg

+/-2,5 deg

+/-7,5 deg

+/-2 mm 0,3 m/s PSEN ml 1.1 0 mm M12, 8-pol. Stiftstecker LiYY 8 x 0,25 mm2 50 m Aluminium, Edelstahl, Edelstahl 1.4016, Kunst-

stoff, Polycarbonat, Stahl verzinkt, Zn 6 Nm 300 mm 217,2 mm 40 mm 40 mm 63,5 mm 40 mm 67,2 mm 895 g 145 g 1.040 g Bei Normenangaben ohne Datum gelten die 2015-11 neuesten Ausgabestnde. Sicherheitstechnische Kennzahlen Betriebsart EN ISO 13849-1:

2008 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2008 Kategorie EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2006, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2008 TM [Jahr]

2-kan. Zu-

haltung PL e Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 2,35E-09 20 Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 35 PSEN ml b 1.1 Betriebsart EN ISO 13849-1:

2008 PL EN ISO 13849-1:

2008 Kategorie EN IEC 62061 SIL CL EN IEC 62061 PFHD [1/h]

Lambda d/

Lambda EN ISO 13849-1 2006, EN IEC B10D EN ISO 13849-1:

2008 TM [Jahr]

2-kan. OSSD PL e Cat. 4 SIL CL 3 2,44E-09 20 WICHTIG Beachten Sie unbedingt die mechanische Lebensdauer. Die sicherheits-

technischen Kennzahlen gelten nur, solange die Werte der mechanischen Lebensdauer eingehalten werden. Ergnzende Daten Funkzulassungen Bestelldaten System Produkttyp PSEN ml b 1.1 unit PSEN ml b 1.1 switch PSEN ml 1.1 actuator Merkmale Mechanisches Schutztrsystem mit Zuhaltung, codiert Mechanischer Sicherheitsschalter mit Zuhaltung, codiert Bettiger, codiert Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 Anschlussart Bestell-Nr. M12, 8-

pol.Stiftstecker M12, 8-

pol.Stiftstecker 570400 570401 570480 36 USA/Canada FCC ID: IC: FCC/IC-Requirements: This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this product not expressly approved by Pilz may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Le prsent produit est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le produit ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de le produit doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. VT8-PSENML7482A-PSENML PSEN ml b 1.1 Zubehr Montagezubehr Produkttyp PSEN ml mounting plate PSEN ml bracket sliding door Merkmale Montageplatte fr die Montage des Sicherheitsschal-

ters, mit 4 Innensechskant-Schrauben und 1 Linsen-

kopf-Sicherheitsschraube mit Einwegschlitz, M5x40 Montagewinkel fr die Montage des Bettigers an ei-

ner Schiebetr, mit 2 Innensechskant -Schrauben und 1 Linsenkopf-Sicherheitsschraube mit Einwegschlitz, M5x16 Bestell-Nr. 570 490 570 492 Kabel Produkttyp PSEN cable M12-8sf Anschluss 1 gerade, M12, 8-polig, Buchse Anschluss 2 offenes Kabel PSEN cable M12-8sf M12-8sm gerade, M12, 8-polig, Buchse gerade, M12, 8-

polig, Stift Lnge 3 m 5 m 10 m 20 m 30 m 0,5 m 1 m 1,5 m 2 m 5 m 10 20 m 30 m Bestell-Nr. 540 319 540 320 540 321 540 333 540 326 540 345 540 346 540 347 540 340 540 341 540 342 540 343 540 344 Anhang Die nachfolgende Checkliste ist als Hilfsmittel zur Untersttzung bei der Inbetriebnahme, Wiederinbetriebnahme und der vorgeschriebenen regelmigen Prfung des PSEN ml b 1.1 gedacht. Beachten Sie, dass die Checkliste nicht die vorgeschriebene anlagenspezifische Sicher-

heitsanalyse fr Inbetriebnahme/Wiederinbetriebnahme und die sich daraus ergebenden erforderlichen Prfungen und Ttigkeiten ersetzt. INFO Inbetriebnahme, Wiederinbetriebnahme und die regelmige Prfung darf ausschlielich durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgefhrt werden. Wir empfehlen die ordnungsgem ausgefllte Checkliste aufzubewahren und sie als Refe-

renz bei den Maschinenunterlagen zu hinterlegen. Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 37 PSEN ml b 1.1 Da-

tum Ttigkeit Sicher-

heits-

schalter Nummer Bettiger Nummer Nicht OK OK Bemerkungen Unterschrift EG-Konformittserklrung Diese(s) Produkt(e) erfllen die Anforderungen der Richtlinie 2006/42/EG ber Maschinen des europischen Parlaments und des Rates. Die vollstndige EG-Konformittserklrung finden Sie im Internet unter www.pilz.com/downloads. Bevollmchtigter: Norbert Frhlich, Pilz GmbH & Co. KG, Felix-Wankel-Str. 2, 73760 Ostfil-

dern, Deutschland Bedienungsanleitung PSEN ml b 1.1 1003884-DE-01 Draft 18 38 Titelseite y n a m r e G n i d e t n i r P 4 0

-

6 1 0 2

, 8 1 t f a r D 1 0

-

E D

-

4 8 8 3 0 0 1 5 1 0 2

, G K

. o C

&

H b m G z l i P The Best of German EngineeringPartner of:SupportTechnische Untersttzung von Pilz erhalten Sie rund um die Uhr. AmerikaBrasilien+55 11 97569-2804Kanada+1 888-315-PILZ (315-7459)Mexiko+52 55 5572 1300USA (toll-free)+1 877-PILZUSA (745-9872)AsienChina+86 21 60880878-216 Japan+81 45 471-2281Sdkorea+82 31 450 0680Australien+61 3 95446300EuropaBelgien, Luxemburg+32 9 3217575Deutschland+49 711 3409-444Frankreich+33 3 88104000Grobritannien+44 1536 462203Irland+353 21 4804983Italien+39 0362 1826711Niederlande+31 347 320477sterreich+43 1 7986263-0Schweiz+41 62 88979-30Skandinavien+45 74436332Spanien+34 938497433Trkei+90 216 5775552Unsere internationale Hotline erreichen Sie unter: +49 711 3409-444 support@pilz.comCMSE, InduraNET p, PAS4000, PAScal, PASconfig, Pilz, PIT, PLID, PMCprimo, PMCprotego, PMCtendo, PMD, PMI, PNOZ, Primo, PSEN, PSS, PVIS, SafetyBUS p, SafetyEYE, SafetyNET p, ThE SPIrIT Of SAfETY sind in einigen Lndern amtlich registrierte und geschtzte Marken der Pilz Gmbh & Co. KG. Wir weisen darauf hin, dass die Produkteigenschaften je nach Stand bei Drucklegung und Ausstattungsumfang von den Angaben in diesem Dokument abweichen knnen. fr die Aktualitt, richtigkeit und Vollstndigkeit der in Text und Bild dargestellten Informationen bernehmen wir keine haftung. Bitte nehmen Sie bei rckfragen Kontakt zu unserem Technischen Support auf.Pilz Gmbh & Co. KG felix-Wankel-Strae 2 73760 Ostfildern, DeutschlandTel.: +49 711 3409-0 fax: +49 711 3409-133 info@pilz.comwww.pilz.comPilz entwickelt umweltfreundliche Produkte unter Verwendung kologischer Werkstoffe und energiesparender Techniken. In kologisch gestalteten Gebuden wird umweltbewusst und energiesparend produziert und gearbeitet. So bietet Pilz Ihnen Nachhaltigkeit mit der Sicherheit, energieeffiziente Produkte und umweltfreundliche Lsungen zu erhalten.haben Sie fragen zur Maschinensicherheit? Pilz antwortet auf www.wissen-maschinensicherheit.de100XXXX-DE-0X0-0-1-3-000, 2015-00 Printed in Germany Pilz Gmbh & Co. KG, 2015